JP2019088887A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably transmitting commands from main control means to sub-control means.SOLUTION: Main control means determines whether each kind of error has occurred (S501-S508) by error determination processing (S102), and stores occurrence information of each kind of error, namely the determination result, in each bit of first and second error determination buffer memories 203b, 203c. An error command of a high byte "DDh" or "DEh" with a value of the respective memories 203b, 203c as a low byte is generated by processing of S511, S513.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

  A gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine mainly comprises detecting means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, main control means for controlling the game, and various commands transmitted from the main control means And a variety of devices such as a display device, a lamp, and an audio output device connected to the slave control means. When the main control means determines that the state of the gaming machine is in the predetermined state based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine by the detection means, the main control means notifies the slave control means in order to notify that the state is reached. Send a command The slave control means makes a notification using various devices according to the command.

JP, 2011-155158, A

  Here, in order to notify that the state of the gaming machine has reached a predetermined state, the main control means sends command to the slave control means in the command storage means provided in the main control means. You need to store the command.

  The main control means is not only a command for informing that the state of the gaming machine has reached a predetermined state, but in order to cause the slave control means to perform various controls, various other commands are sequentially stored in the command storage means Remember to

  At this time, if a command is stored in the command storage means in the full storage capacity of the command storage means, there is a possibility that the instruction given by the main control means to the slave control means may be inaccurate. there were.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and preferably uses the capacity of the command storage means to transmit a command from the main control means to the slave control means. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 controls the game based on a main control means for performing main control of the game and a command transmitted from the main control means via the signal line. A control means and a notification means for giving a notification based on an instruction from the secondary control means, and a detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means comprising the detection means When a command is generated by a command generation unit for generating a command, a command storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the commands, and a command generation unit based on the detected status of the gaming machine, the command is Command storage / executing means to be stored in the command storage means; transmitting means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means; And determining means for determining whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is based on the detection result of the detection means, the command generation means comprising It is the judgment result information which shows the judgment result of the above-mentioned judgment means, and contains a plurality of the judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among a plurality of kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine in one command. When the command is generated, and the slave control means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the gaming machine is based on the determination result information included in the command. A slave-side determining means for determining whether or not one of the above-mentioned abnormal states is established, and based on the determination result information contained in the command received by the Te, when the gaming machine is determined by said detail side determination means has a non-normal state of any is to instruct the notification in accordance with the state to the notifying means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the command generation unit generates a command including first determination result information corresponding to a first state of the gaming machine. Generating the command without including the second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine incompatible with the first state, and the slave side determination means is transmitted by the transmission means When the slave control means receives the command, the second slave determines whether or not both the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the received command. A determination result information included in the command when it includes a side determination means, and it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included by the second slave side determination means. To It is intended to non-executable instructions informing the brute.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the slave control means determines that the second slave side determination means includes the first determination result information and the second determination result information. And the notification means is instructed to notify the notification means in a mode different from the case where the slave side determination means determines that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state when the received command is continuously received. It is a thing.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the determination means determines any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine every predetermined time. It is determined whether or not it is in the state based on the detection result of the detection means, and the command generation means is configured to determine the state of the determination means every time the determination means performs the determination for each predetermined time. A command is generated that includes a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine, which are determination result information indicating a determination result. It is a thing.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the detection means detects the state of the gaming machine, the command generation means of the main control means generates a command based on the detected state of the gaming machine, and the command is generated. The storage execution means stores the command in a plurality of storable command storages. Here, the main control means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has become based on the detection result of the detection means. The command generation means is the judgment result information indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and the plural judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among plural kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine is Generate a command to be included in the command. Therefore, when an unsent command stored in the command storage unit is transmitted to the slave control unit, the slave control unit having received the command is based on the determination result information included in the command. The slave-side determining means determines that the gaming machine is in any abnormal state. If it is determined by the subordinate determination means that the gaming machine is in any of the abnormal states, the notification means is instructed to notify in accordance with the state. Therefore, the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including, in one command, a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine. By transmitting to the control means, notification can be executed according to a plurality of determination result information included in the command, so that a command including one determination result information is generated for each type of unauthorized state of the gaming machine. The number of commands generated by the main control means can be reduced compared to the case of generation. As a result, the capacity of the command storage unit can be efficiently used, so that there is an effect that transmission of a command from the main control unit to the sub control unit can be suitably performed.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including the first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine in one command, the command is incompatible with the first state. The second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine is not included. In spite of that, it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the command received by the secondary control means by the second secondary side determination means of the secondary control means. In this case, the command received by the slave control unit is affected by noise mixing in the wiring interposed between the master control unit and the slave control unit or a break or short circuit in the wiring. May be In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, when a command including the first determination result information and the second determination result information is continuously received by the secondary control means, each command is not due to a single noise effect, and the main control There is a high possibility that the phenomenon may be due to a continuous phenomenon such as a short circuit or an open circuit of a wire which intervenes the means and the secondary control means. On the other hand, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, the slave side determination means The notification means is instructed to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. By this notification, it is possible to notify the attendants of the game arcade that there may have been a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring, so the game is played by the gaming machine in a state in which the short circuit or disconnection of the wiring has occurred. Has the effect of being able to prevent

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects can be achieved. That is, the determination means of the main control means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is set, at predetermined time intervals. The command is a command that includes a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine each time by the command generation unit. Generate Therefore, the slave control means can perform the determination by the second slave side determination means one by one by transmitting such a command by the transmission means, so that an abnormal state such as a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring can be found promptly. To that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably prevent the game from being performed by the gaming machine in a state in which a short circuit or a disconnection or the like of the wiring occurs.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation production screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern command stored in the fluctuation pattern command field. It is explanatory drawing which represented typically the structure of the buffer memory for 1st error determination. It is explanatory drawing which represented the structure of the buffer memory for 2nd error determination typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10; (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the radio wave detection device to the MPU, and (b) is the 0th buffer memory for the first error determination set in the MPU by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 3 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 4th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU And (c) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU, (b) is a second of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the inner frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is the first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 5 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 6th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the first specified winning switch to the MPU, (c) 11 is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the error determination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing radio wave detection processing executed by the MPU in the main control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing winning switch abnormality determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. And (c) is a flowchart showing a front frame opening determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a front frame opening prize determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device, and (b) an inner frame opening judgment process executed by the MPU in the main control device It is the flowchart shown. (A) is a flow chart showing a wrong prize determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device, and is a flow chart showing a vibration detection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed operation execution processing at the time of the error performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the operation execution processing at the time of the 1st error which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd error time operation execution processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the error determination processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the radio wave detection device to the MPU, and (b) is the 0th buffer memory for the first error determination set in the MPU by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 3 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 4th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU And (c) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU, (b) is a second of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the inner frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is the first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 5 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 6th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the first specified winning switch to the MPU, (c) 11 is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the operation | movement execution process at the time of the error performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the wiring abnormality determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame (glass door frame) 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, to change the effect pattern of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of the reach effect. Operated.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball inlet 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation The symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, of the balls (retention balls) of which the fluctuation has not been executed The number of holding balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, with this pachinko machine 10, in the drawing which is done vis-a-vis the entry to the 1st ball entrance 64, while doing the success / failure decision (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, when it is decided that it is the big hit It also determines the As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and usually a jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) become short.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of In the high-probability state (in a definite variation) in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) to be described later is increased, and the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened. By becoming easy, the state of the game in which a ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 is included.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases with the jackpot probability unchanged. The motorized prize associated with the first ball entry port 64 is more likely to be released, which means a gaming state in which the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry port 64.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric role associated with the first ball entry 64 opens or the hitting in the second symbol The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed. For example, in the low probability state or the high probability state, the open time of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be longer than that in the other gaming states. Further, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the motorized combination per one time in the second symbol is larger than that of the other gaming states.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 configured by (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second ball entrance 67 The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, upper, middle and lower Three symbol rows of are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The specific display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the center frame 86, a holding lamp 85 is disposed in the upper portion of the third symbol display device 81. The first entry ball slot 64 is until the stop symbol (15R positive variation big hit symbol, 15R normal big hit symbol, 2R positive variation big hit symbol, any one of the left symbols) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 When entering the ball, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the number of lights of the suspension lamp 85. The holding lamps 85 are provided for four for the maximum holding number, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entry slot 64 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the reserve lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times of suspension of the variable display based on the winning on the first entrance 64 is reserved in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of times. Further, since the number of holding times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is possible not to perform lighting display by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately lights a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first ball inlet 64 is activated only for a predetermined time (open Be configured to be). The number of times of passage of the second ball entrance 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically on the lower portion of the third symbol display device 81 of the center frame 86.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery for a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the fluctuation display is stopped, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol according to the lottery result is the third symbol display The stop display is made on the effective line L1 of the device 81. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  The first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center of the first variable winning device 65. . Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first large opening 65a, and a first large opening for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a solenoid (not shown). The first large opening 65a is normally in a closed state (closed state) in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of "15R probability variation big hit", drive the first large opening solenoid to tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, temporarily open state (open state) the ball is easy to win the first large opening 65a , And operate so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the side of the first ball entrance 64 (the left side in FIG. 2), and the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a has a horizontally long rectangular shape. It is provided. Specifically, the second variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second large opening 650a, and a second large opening for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a solenoid (not shown). Like the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a is normally in a closed state (closed state) in which the ball can not be won or is difficult to be won. When a big hit other than "15R probability variation big hit" is generated, the second large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball is easily opened in the second large open port 650a The open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state at the normal time are alternately repeated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, one of the large opening 65a, 650a normally closed is alternately opened and closed alternately for a predetermined time.

  The opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), and the opening and closing operation of the second opening 650a can be up to 15 times (15 rounds) or 2 times 2 rounds) are made repeatable. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. For example, when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the first large opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball is open first during the opening of the first large opening 65a. A gaming state in which the second large opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state, triggered by winning into the mouth 65a. In addition, when only one first large opening 65a is provided as the specific winning opening arranged on the game board 13, when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is lit, the first large opening 65a A game state may be formed as a special game state, in which the game player repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times every predetermined time.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the fluctuation effect screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a schematic view showing an actual screen and an effective line setting when the fluctuation effect is horizontally scrolled.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, a big hit lottery is performed, and in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is combined with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37a). Execute the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the symbol. The variation effect is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol periodically (rightwardly scroll) scroll from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) for each symbol row with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, at the time of this horizontal scroll, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right upward line L4, and a left upward line L5 are set as effective lines. And, at the time of the stop of the fluctuation production which scrolls to the side at the time of each game, the jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot if the combination of jackpot symbols (for example, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any of the activated lines . In the case of the horizontal scroll, the fluctuation effect stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

  And the combination of the jackpot symbols aligned on one effective line is the combination of the same odd symbols (the main symbols to which the odd numbers are associated), that is, “1” “1” “1” “3” “3” "If it is either" 3 "," 5 "" 5 "" 5 "" 7 "" 7 "" 7 "or" 9 "" 9 "" 9 ", as" 15R probability variation jackpot " While the jackpot moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the first large opening 65a is opened and closed 15 times at maximum (15 rounds), and then the gaming state transitions to the "high probability state".

  In addition, the combination of jackpot symbols aligned on one effective line is the combination of the same even symbols (main symbols to which even numbers are associated), that is, “0” “0” “0” “2” “2” In the case of “2”, “4” “4” “4” “4” “6” “6” “6” or “8” “8” “8”, “15R normal jackpot” While the jackpot animation is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the second large opening 650a is opened and closed 15 times at maximum (15 rounds), and then the gaming state is "low probability state", but "time-shortening Transition to state.

  Furthermore, when the combination of jackpot symbols arranged on one effective line is a chance eye of "3" "4" "1", the jackpot moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "2R probability variation jackpot". While being displayed, the second large opening port 650a is opened and closed up to twice (two rounds), and then the gaming state transitions to the "high probability state".

  As described above, the third symbol display device 81 executes the fluctuation display of the third symbol in response to the winning of the first ball entrance 64, and the third symbol displayed and stopped on the effective line as a result of the fluctuation effect The player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot type determination if the result is a jackpot by the combination of the above. Therefore, the player can have an expectation of becoming a big hit and an expectation that the gaming state becomes a high probability state by the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, thereby enhancing the interest for the game. It is possible to

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is constituted by an 8-bit microcomputer, and the ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and various data etc. temporarily when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices in order for the main control device 110 to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate. In the present embodiment, various commands are composed of 2 bytes, and 8-bit parallel data includes the first byte via the main control unit 110 and the input / output ports 205, 215, 225 of the sub control unit, It is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in the order of the second byte.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 instructs the sub control device to operate, various commands for that are temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. Then, when the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23) is executed, the set various commands are transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the sub control apparatus.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the ROM 202, as fixed value data used to control these processes, a big hit random number table used for big hit lottery, a big hit type table used to decide a big hit type, a variation pattern table used to decide a variation pattern, etc. At least stored.

  In addition, in the RAM 203, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in the second symbol display device 83, etc.) are controlled. There are various counters to do this.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  In the jackpot lottery, the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 23). Furthermore, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process. The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the update timing of the counter for each counter, and uses the value of the counter. Make an update.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). In the reserve area, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer according to the timing of entering the first entry ball slot 64 are used. It is an area for temporary storage (pending). Also, the execution area stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the change pattern of the big hit lottery and the change effect and the stop type at the start timing of the change. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer at that time Are stored in one of the first to fourth areas reserved.

  At this time, when there is no hold in the hold area and all the first to fourth areas are vacant, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first and second areas for storage, the value of each counter is stored in the third area for reservation. If there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the fourth area.

  Thus, the values of the counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning may be stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of start winnings. it can. When the start winning combination is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to at most four start winnings.

  Further, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area, and Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, and the determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of stop symbol are performed.

  In addition, after the value of each counter in the first reserve area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the second reserve area is shifted to the first reserve area which is free and stored in the third reserve area. The value of each counter is shifted to the reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area, the holding is reduced by one, and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 was sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reached the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899) It is done by returning to 0 after. In the case where the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, but also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

  The value of the first collision random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is the value of the random number (large jack random number; also referred to as a winning value) Play a jackpot lottery.

  The value of the jackpot random number (jump random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first stored in the execution area of the holding sphere storage area If the value of the per-random number counter C1 matches the per-random number value set by the per-big random number table, it is determined as a big hit, and the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the pending storage area is a big hit random If it does not match the numerical value, it is determined to be out.

  Here, the jackpot random number table is a jackpot random number value referred to in the gaming state low probability state (that is, a period that is not in the definite change), and a big hit randomness that is referred to in the gaming condition high probability state (ie in the definite change). It is divided into numerical values, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the jackpot random number table in association with the “low probability state”. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the high probability state is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, "448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table in association with the "high probability state" It is done.

  When making a big hit lottery, the MPU 201 reads a big hit random number value that matches the playing state at that time from the big hit random number table. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area) used for the big hit lottery is one of the big hit random numbers read from the big hit random number table. It is determined whether or not they match, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is achieved.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is in the low probability state, the first hit is made when the value of the random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the case of the low probability state is 1/300. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, A jackpot occurs when it matches any one of “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit randomness of the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table in the low probability state and the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The numerical value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and it is likely that the jackpot may be improperly attracted. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), The first hit random number counter C1 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that goes out, the fluctuation pattern or , The type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserve area in the reserve sphere storage area is a random number that makes a big win, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect become the one at the big win. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. The jackpot type is determined based on the first collision type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, four types of jackpot types are provided: 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot.

  In the jackpot type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each of these jackpot types. In the present embodiment, the value "0 to 3" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "4 to 7" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R regular jackpot The value "8, 9" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that results in a big hit, a big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "2", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "6," the big hit type If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "9", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first collision type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of becoming out of position, for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the type of stop selected in this embodiment, after reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and after the same reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (rendering) patterns: "reach other than out of front and back" where "stops" except before and after reach symbol and "complete out" where reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the pending first to fourth areas provided in the pending ball storage area. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that goes out, the stop type in the fluctuation effect is , It will be the one at the time of removal. In this case, the type of stop at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to 98, 99 for “front and back out of reach”, 90 to 97 for “front and back out of reach”, “front and back out of reach” and “reach other than for back and forth out” is narrow It becomes difficult to select out-of-reach and out-of-front reach.

  In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter used to determine a fluctuation pattern, and is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198) It has become. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a round trip process (see FIG. 17) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 23).

  At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be executed. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation.

  That is, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select the third symbol from among the variation modes in which the variation display can be performed in the variation time The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, in accordance with the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 causes the sound output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. While making it output, the lamp | ramp of the lamp display apparatus 227 (electric decoration parts 29-33) is made to light-up and blink-display.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time can be determined by decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer and can not perform complicated processing, but when the change pattern is determined, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the change time. As compared with the case where the detail of the variation mode is determined by the main controller 110, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be performed easily. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control apparatus 113 etc., and the command necessary for the notification may be There is a risk that it will have to be composed of bytes or more, and sending and receiving of commands may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, so if the voice lamp control device 113 or the like is notified of only the information related to the determined fluctuation time Well, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the transmission and reception of the command becomes complicated. In addition, even if only the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is determined in main controller 110, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 determines the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time among many fluctuation modes. Since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the fluctuation display in the determined fluctuation mode, a variety of fluctuation effects can be given to the player, thereby improving the player's interest be able to.

  The fluctuation time determined here is appropriately set according to the model of the pachinko machine 10. The ROM 202 stores a variation pattern table different for each model, and a variation time different for each model is determined by the variation pattern table.

  As the fluctuation pattern table, the first fluctuation pattern table used at 15R probability variation big hit and 15R normal jackpot, the second variation pattern table used at 2R probability variation big hit, and the kind of stop other than reach or not reach A third variation pattern table, which is sometimes used, and a fourth variation pattern table, which is used when the stop type is completely out, are prepared. In addition, the fourth variation pattern table, depending on whether the game state is a short time state (including the time of probability variation of hitting the second symbol increased (high probability state of the third symbol)), according to A fourth variation pattern table and a non-time-shorting fourth variation pattern table are prepared.

  When determining the fluctuation pattern, the MPU 201 is a jackpot performed based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area. The fluctuation pattern table to be used is extracted from the first to fourth fluctuation pattern tables based on the lottery, the judgment of the jackpot type, the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the playing state at that time (whether the time saving state or not). Then, according to the extracted fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is determined by specifying the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer at that time.

  In the first variation pattern table used at 15R probability variation big hit and 15R normal big hit, as a variation pattern to be selected, normal reach variation (variation time 20 seconds), super reach A variation (variation time 30 seconds), and super reach B variation (Variation time 60 seconds) and Super Reach C variation (Variation time 90 seconds) are prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. In the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 10” is associated with normal reach variation, and “11 to 99” is associated with super reach A variation. “100 to 189” for the super reach B fluctuation and “190 to 198” for the super reach C fluctuation.

  In the second variation pattern table used for 2R probability variation big hit, 2R dedicated A variation (variation time 25 seconds) and 2R dedicated B variation (variation time 35 seconds) are prepared as selected variation patterns, The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern. As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 49” is corresponded to the 2R dedicated A fluctuation, and “50 to 198” is corresponded to the 2R dedicated B fluctuation. It is attached.

  In the third change pattern table used when the stop type is a reach other than the front-rear reach or the front-rear out, the above-mentioned normal reach fluctuation (the fluctuation time 20 seconds) and the super reach A fluctuation (the fluctuation time) are selected as fluctuation patterns to be selected. 30 seconds) and super reach B fluctuation (variation time 60 seconds) are prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. In the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is associated with normal reach variation, and “100 to 159” is associated with super reach A variation. “160 to 198” is associated with the super reach B change.

  The fourth variation pattern table for time reduction, which is used when the stop type is completely out, is selected at the time reduction state (including the probability change when the probability of hitting the second pattern increases (the high probability state of the third pattern)) Short deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time 7 seconds) and long deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time 10 seconds) are prepared, and the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. . As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 190” is corresponded to the short deviation fluctuation, and “191 to 198” is corresponded to the long deviation fluctuation. ing.

  In addition, in a state other than the time saving state (including the probability change when the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased (the high probability state of the third symbol)), the fourth variation for non-time shortening used when the stop type is completely out Similar to the fourth variation pattern table for time shortening, the pattern table is prepared with the short variation (variation time 7 seconds) and the long variation (variation time 10 seconds) as the variation pattern to be selected. However, the association of the value of the variation type counter CS1 with each variation pattern is different from that of the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction. As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the fourth variation pattern table for non-time shortening of the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is associated with the short deviation fluctuation, and the super reach fluctuation is “100 to 198” are associated with each other.

  Here, the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time reduction state (including the probability variation when the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased (the high probability state of the third symbol)) Since there is, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 easily. Therefore, if a relatively long out-of-range fluctuation of fluctuation time is frequently performed despite being completely out of time while in the time saving state, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, and the player waits for It is possible to give the player a feeling of discomfort. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole.

  Therefore, in the case of complete removal, when the gaming state is in the short time state (including the probability change time when the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased (including the high probability state of the third symbol)), the gaming state is usually excluding the short time state Configure the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction and the fourth variation pattern table for non-time reduction so that the short variation with a short variation time is more easily selected than the long variation, as compared to the state (non-short condition) By performing the start of the next variable display early, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it is selected by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (for example, another fluctuation type counter selects the presence / absence of notice display, etc.) You may. In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the other variation type counter whether or not the first symbol (or third symbol) to be finally stopped is shifted (for example, one symbol is deviated back and forth etc.) It may be determined by

  In addition, although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the case of complete deviation was divided into the fourth fluctuation pattern table for time saving and the fourth fluctuation pattern table for non-time shortening, the gaming state is not the time saving state. Even in the non-time-short state), if there are multiple (for example, 3 or more if the maximum number of 4) holding balls, the variable display may be ended early, so the time-saving off (probable change) change It may be selected with reference to the pattern table, or may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for time saving or non-time saving corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Further, the association between the variation pattern in each variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10. By making the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 different for each model, the probability that each fluctuation pattern is selected can be changed in each model.

  Moreover, although the case where the 1st-4th fluctuation pattern table was prepared was demonstrated in the said description, according to the specification of the model of the pachinko machine 10, you may prepare a fluctuation pattern table.

  As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, 1 is added sequentially in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250) It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired when The number of random numbers to be won is 2 in a non-time-saving state, and the range is “240 to 241”. Further, the number of random numbers to be won is 225 in the short time state, and the range is “5 to 229”.

  That is, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state, it is determined that the winning is performed when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 229”. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-time-short state, it is determined that the winning is performed when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “241 to 242”. And in the case of a hit, while the symbol of "(circle)" is light-displayed as a stop symbol (2nd symbol) on the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the 1st ball entrance 64 is opened only for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17). It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, according to the value of the counters etc., the jackpot lottery, the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various tables such as the big hit random number table, the big hit type table, and the variation pattern table described above, the ROM 202 also includes various commands to be sent to the respective sub control devices (such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). An area for storing data is provided, and the area includes a variation pattern command area 202b.

  Here, the variation pattern command 202 b is an area for storing data of the variation pattern command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Here, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command area 202b. The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the main controller 110.

  Here, the command output from main controller 110 to each sub-control device consists of 2 bytes, and this variation pattern command indicates that the upper byte (upper 8 bits) is the variation pattern command. Composed of the value "F1h", and the lower byte (lower 8 bits) of the variation pattern command indicates the variation time determined by the main controller 110.

  Specifically, the lower byte "10h" of the variation pattern command indicates that the variation time is 7 seconds, the lower byte "12h" of the variation pattern command indicates that the variation time is 10 seconds, and the variation pattern command The lower byte "14h" of the indicates that the change time is 20 seconds, the lower byte "16h" of the change pattern command indicates that the change time is 30 seconds, and the change is caused by the lower byte "18h" of the change pattern command It indicates that the time is 60 seconds, the lower byte "20h" of the fluctuation pattern command indicates that the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time is 25 seconds by the lower byte "22h" of the fluctuation pattern command. Change time is 35 seconds by the lower byte "24h" of the change pattern command. Shows the Rukoto.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command "F110h", it determines that the variation time determined by the main control device 110 is 7 seconds, and selects a short deviation variation of 7 seconds as the specific variation mode. The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 that the variation effect is performed in the selected short deviation variation. When the fluctuation pattern command "F112h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 10 seconds, and the selected fluctuation is selected by selecting the 10 seconds long fluctuation as the specific fluctuation mode. The display control device 114 is notified that the fluctuation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 due to the fluctuation. When the fluctuation pattern command “F114h” is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is determined to be 20 seconds, and one of a plurality of 20 seconds of normal reach fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The display control device 114 is notified that the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the selected normal reach variation.

  When the fluctuation pattern command "F116h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 30 seconds, and one of a plurality of 30 seconds of super reach A fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach A change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F118h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main control unit 110 is judged to be 60 seconds, and one of a plurality of 60 seconds of super reach B fluctuation is selected as the concrete fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach B change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F120h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 90 seconds, and one of a plurality of 90 seconds of super reach C fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach C change so that the change effect is performed.

  When the fluctuation pattern command "F122h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main control unit 110 is judged to be 25 seconds, and one of a plurality of 25 seconds 2R dedicated A fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected 2R dedicated A change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F124h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is determined to be 35 seconds, and one of a plurality of 35 seconds of 2R dedicated B fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected 2R-dedicated B change so that the change effect is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the main controller 110 will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like are stored in addition to the counter buffer and holding ball storage area shown in FIG. There are work areas (work areas) in which various flags, counters, values of I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 23), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203 has a holding ball number counter 203a. The holding ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waits) up to four times. In this holding ball number counter 203a, the initial value (value set in the RAM initial setting (S714) executed after the power is turned on) is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. Each time the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S403 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S205 in FIG. 16).

  If there is a ball entry into the first entry ball slot 64 (start winning combination), if the number-of-held ball number counter 203a is less than 4, then the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern at that time Each value of the selection counter C3 is obtained from the counter buffer and stored in the holding ball storage area. On the other hand, if the holding ball counter 203a is 4, it means that four holding balls have already been held, so the start winning is ignored.

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S405 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one after being entered into the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and lights the holding lamps 85 for the number of holding balls. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 holds the number of balls in the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 by the number of balls retained command transmitted from the main controller 110 whenever the number-of-balls counter 203 a is incremented by one. You can get the value of itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the number of holding balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the ball has been dropped, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The RAM 203 further includes a first error determination buffer memory 203 b and a second error determination buffer memory 203 c. Here, configurations of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b and the second error determination buffer memory 203 c will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 9 is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. In the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred by the error determination process (S102) (that is, the state where the pachinko machine 10 can normally play a game) Is a memory for storing an error command in which the determination result is stored and the result is reflected.

  Although the details will be described later, the error determination process (S102) is a process that is executed in a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every 2 ms, and among a plurality of types of errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 For each type of error, based on the values of various flags and counters, and input signals from various switches and sensors 208 connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, It is a process to determine. Through this process, each area (each bit) of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is information indicating the occurrence status of an error of the type corresponding to each area (information indicating the occurrence of an error, occurrence of an error) Information) is stored, and information indicating the occurrence of another type of error is stored in a partial area (partial bits) of the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the first error determination buffer memory 203b is a memory composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the next error is determined by the error determination process (S102) in each bit of the memory 203b. Information indicating the occurrence status of is stored. That is, information indicating the occurrence status of "radio wave detection error" is stored in the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and information indicating the occurrence status of "winning error when opening the front frame" is provided in the 1st bit Is stored, and the second bit stores information indicating the occurrence status of the “winning switch abnormal error”. Further, the third bit stores information indicating whether the front frame (glass door frame) 14 is opened, and the fourth bit stores information indicating whether the front frame 14 is closed. As a result, the third bit and the fourth bit store information indicating the occurrence status of the “front frame opening error”. The fifth bit stores information indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 is released, and the sixth bit stores information indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 is closed. The 5th and 6th bits store information indicating the occurrence of the "inner frame opening error". Further, the seventh bit stores information indicating the occurrence status of the "first incorrect winning error". The details of various errors will be described later.

  Then, the information (value) indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of errors stored in the first error determination buffer memory 203 b and the information (fixed value) indicating that it is an error command including those information In addition, an error command of 1 is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the error command is composed of 2 bytes. The lower byte of the error command generated based on the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b uses the value of the memory 203b as it is, and the upper byte of the error command is generated based on the memory 203b. Configured with a fixed value "DDh" specific to the error command being sent.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the second error determination buffer memory 203c is a memory configured of 1 byte (8 bits) as in the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and the error determination process (S102) is performed. Information is stored in the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and the 1st bit in the memory 203b stores the error command. Information indicating whether or not a vibration of a predetermined value level (intensity) is detected by a vibration sensor 208g described later is stored, and the vibration (intensity) detected by the vibration sensor 208g is less than a predetermined value level in the second bit Information indicating whether the “vibration detection error” has occurred is stored in the first bit and the second bit. It is paid. There is no error assigned to the remaining bits (that is, the third to seventh bits) of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and "0" is always stored in each of the remaining bits. The details of various errors will be described later.

  Then, information (values) indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of errors stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c and a fixed value indicating that the information is an error command including the information are combined (added ), An error command of 1 is generated. The lower byte of the error command generated based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is used as it is, and the upper byte of the error command is generated based on the memory 203c. It is configured by a fixed value "DEh" specific to an error command to be performed.

  Each error command generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. The error command set in the ring buffer is then used as an 8-bit parallel data in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device It is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 in the order of the upper byte and the lower byte via the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of 113.

  Although details will be described later, when an error command of 1 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 analyzes information indicating the occurrence status of various errors included in the command and generates the error command. Perform notification according to the type of error that has occurred. As a result, since the occurrence of an error and the type of the occurrence can be reported to a person in charge at the game arcade, the person in charge at the game arcade can promptly take action according to the error that has occurred.

  Also, since each error command generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c includes information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of different types of errors, one error command is generated. The voice lamp control device 113 can be notified of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors simply by transmitting.

  For example, occurrence of each error of “radio wave detection error”, “front frame opening prize error”, “prize switch abnormal error”, “front frame opening error”, “inner frame opening error” and “first incorrect prize error” When information indicating the status is transmitted by separate error commands, the main controller 110 transmits at most six error commands at one time to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, assuming that each error command is composed of 2 bytes in the same manner as the error command of the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 generates a maximum of 12 bytes of information as an error command. Will be sent to.

  Also, when information indicating the occurrence status of each of the “first incorrect prize error” and the “vibration detection error” is transmitted by separate error commands, the main control device 110 transmits it to the voice lamp control device 113 at one time. Assuming that the maximum number of error commands is 2 and each error command is composed of 2 bytes as described above, the main control unit 110 controls the voice lamp to transmit 4 bytes of information at maximum as an error command. It will be sent to the device 113.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “radio wave detection error” is generated only by transmitting one command of 2 bytes generated by the main control device 110 based on the value of the first error determination memory 203b. , "Voice in front frame opening error", "Prize switch error", "front frame opening error", "inner frame opening error" and "first incorrect prize error" information indicating the occurrence of each error, voice Only by notifying the lamp control device 113 at one time, and by transmitting only one 2-byte command generated by the main control device 110 based on the value of the second error determination memory 203 c The sound lamp control device 113 is notified at a time of information indicating the occurrence status of each of the “vibration detection error” errors.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors in one command is generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c. Since the error command including is transmitted, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced compared to the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands.

  Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be suitably performed.

  Note that notification of an error by the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed by emitting light from the illumination portions 29 to 33 such as LEDs disposed on the periphery of the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, and sound from a speaker (not shown). It is performed by any one of the output, the display on the 7-segment display 37b, and the like, or a combination thereof.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various errors indicated by the value of each bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b and the values of each bit of second error determination buffer memory 203c Describe various errors.

  First, various errors indicated by the value of each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b will be described.

  The “radio wave detection error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that a radio wave equal to or higher than a set value level is detected (detected) by a radio wave detection device 208a described later. As an example of fraudulent acts, there is an act of irradiating radio waves to various MPUs, various switches, various sensors, etc., causing each to malfunction, and causing a jackpot lottery or a payout of balls to be generated illegally. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is notified of the situation where the radio wave of the set value or more is irradiated as a "radio wave detection error".

  Although the details will be described later, the radio wave detection device 208a outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 when it detects a radio wave of a set value or more. The MPU 201 determines that a "radio wave detection error" has occurred based on the on signal from the radio wave detection device 208a, sets "0" to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and "radio wave detection" It stores the determination result that an error has occurred. After that, the occurrence of “radio wave detection error” is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. As a result, the occurrence of the "radio wave detection error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  "Front frame opening prize error" is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 has been detected while the front frame (glass door) 14 is open. Error. In the state where the front frame (glass door) 14 is open, anyone can touch the game board 13, so the ball detected in such a state does not cause the game ball to be fired by the launcher, and the hand or tool is released. There is a possibility that the prize is won by the fraudulent act of entering the prize opening directly using. Therefore, in the state where the front frame (glass door) 14 is opened, the situation where the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first entrance 64 is detected is exemplified above as "presence frame open prize error". It enables early detection of fraudulent activity.

  Although the details will be described later, a signal (an on signal of the front frame open switch 208e) output to the MPU 201 when the front frame (glass door) 14 is open (opened) from the front frame open switch 208e and a start described later Based on the detection signal of the ball (on signal from the start winning switch 208) output when the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the winning switch 208, the MPU 201 “opens the front frame It is determined that the hour winning error has occurred, and the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1". Thereafter, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “front frame opening prize error” by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. As a result, the occurrence of the "front frame opening prize error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The "prize switch abnormal error" is a start winning switch 208b for detecting the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry (opening) 64, a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the first entry 64 This is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the detection of the sphere continues even if (for example, 0.2 seconds or more) is exceeded.

  When the ball of 1 continues to be detected by the start winning switch 208 b after the time sufficient for the ball of 1 to pass through the first ball entrance 64, failure of the switch 208 b or the first ball entrance In addition to the occurrence of ball clogging at 64, there is a possibility that the following fraudulent acts are being conducted. That is, by attaching an illegal device (for example, a so-called "Goto ball") to the winning opening, transmitting a radio signal (such as radio waves) to the device, and changing the state of the device, the winning opening has no actual condition. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts to detect winnings have been conducted. Therefore, when a ball is being detected, the output period of the detection signal (ON signal) output from the start winning switch 208b has a sufficient time (for example, 0.2 seconds) to pass through the first entrance 64. When the output is longer than the above, the MPU 201 determines that the "prize switch abnormal error" has occurred, and sets "1" to the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Thereafter, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203b. As a result, the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The “front frame opening error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the open state of the front frame 14 is detected by a front frame opening switch 208 e described later. If the front frame 14 is open, the game board 13 is modified to make it easy for the ball to enter each winning opening, or the winning opening 63, 64, 65a is detected as having a solid ball. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as the attachment of a trap may be carried out. Therefore, the MPU 201 generates a “front frame open error” based on a signal (on signal) output when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the open state (open state) of the front frame (glass door) 14. It determines that it has been set, sets "1" to the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “front frame opening error”, that is, the front frame 14 is opened. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies that the front frame 14 is opened by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like. When the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the fourth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  On the other hand, based on the signal (off signal) output when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the closed state of the front frame 14, the MPU 201 determines that the “front frame open error” is released. The fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1" to generate an error command. Then, by transmitting this command to the audio lamp control device 113, it is confirmed that the front frame 14 is closed to the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the "front frame open error" is released. Notice. At this time, if the sound lamp control device 113 is executing notification of "front frame opening error", the notification corresponding to "front frame opening error" is ended. Since the notification is ended when the front frame 14 is closed, it is possible to notify an attendant or the like of the game arcade having the front frame 14 closed that the front frame 14 has been closed. When the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the third bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  The “inner frame open error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the open state of the inner frame 12 is detected by an inner frame open switch 208 f described later. When the inner frame 12 is opened, as described above, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as unauthorized attachment of the game board 13 or the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. may be performed. The main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and performing control related to the payout of balls are subjected to fraudulent acts in which an illegal substrate such as a so-called "hanging substrate" is attached There is a risk of Therefore, it is assumed that the “inner frame open error” occurs based on the signal (on signal) output when the inner frame open switch 208 f detects the open state (open state) of the inner frame 12. The MPU 201 sets "1" in the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, generates an error command, and transmits it to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “inner frame opening error” (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the inner frame 12 is opened by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like. When the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the sixth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 does not generate the “inner frame open error” based on the signal (off signal) output when the inner frame open switch 208 f detects the closed state (closed state) of the inner frame 12. It is determined that the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1" to generate an error command, which is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the inner frame 12 is closed, that is, the "inner frame open error" is released. At this time, if the voice lamp control device 113 is executing notification of the “inner frame opening error”, the voice lamp control device 113 ends the notification corresponding to the “inner frame opening error”. Since the notification is ended when the inner frame 12 is closed, it is possible to notify an employee or the like of the game arcade who closed the inner frame 12 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. When the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the fifth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  The “first fraudulent winning error” is an entry into the first large opening 65a despite the period in which the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is not open (ie, closed). This is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the ball has been detected by the first specific winning switch 208c described later. As described above, the first large opening 65a is in the open state at the time of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot, and other than this, it is in the closed state in which the ball can not enter. Therefore, if the ball entering the first large opening 65a is detected during a period when the first large opening 65a does not enter the open state, the first large opening 65a is illegally opened to play the game. There is a possibility that fraudulent conduct is being conducted. In addition, there is a possibility that a failure of the first specific winning switch 208c or a ball clogging in the first large opening 65a may occur. Therefore, in such a case, the MPU 201 determines that the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred, sets "1" in the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and generates an error command. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the occurrence of the "first incorrect prize error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "first incorrect prize error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The various errors whose judgment results are stored in each bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b by the error judgment processing (S102) described above are likely to be adopted even in models different from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Error related to the high configuration (ie, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present application is a highly probable error which is required to be notified even in a model having different game contents and game characteristics. Therefore, even in models having different configurations, game contents, game characteristics, etc., the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh" can be used repeatedly to create the program etc. It makes it easy to create a pachinko machine that reports the occurrence of an error.

  On the other hand, the various errors stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c by the error determination process (S102) described below have significant importance of error notification depending on the game content and game characteristics of the pachinko machine It is an error that depends on the game content or the playability of each model, which is changed or there is no target for error. Also in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various types of errors whose determination results are stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c are required to be notified by the model of the pachinko machine 10, but with the pachinko machine 10 There is a high possibility that notification will not be performed or become unnecessary on another model. Therefore, when creating a program for a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, the code of the error command of the upper byte "DEh" may be assigned to an error specific to that pachinko machine.

  The “second fraudulent winning error” is an error related to the second large opening (the second specified winning opening) 650a. The determination result of the “second incorrect prize winning error” is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203 c for the following reason. That is, in models different from the pachinko machine 10, there are many that place only one winning opening similar to the first large opening 65a and the second large opening 650a in the game area to play a game, and have both It is because there are few things that play a game.

  The “second fraudulent winning error” is generated by a second specified winning switch 208d described later, regardless of the period when the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a is not open (ie, closed). This is an error that is notified when it is determined by the MPU 201 that entry into the second large opening port 650a has been detected. Similarly to the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a is in a closed state in which the ball can not enter normally, and is in an open state when a 15R normal big hit or a 2R positive variation big hit occurs. Therefore, if the ball entering the second large opening 650a is detected during a period when the second large opening 650a does not enter the open state, the second large opening 650a is illegally opened to play the game. Cheating, failure of the second specified winning switch 208d, ball clogging in the second large opening 650a, and the like may occur. Therefore, in such a case, the MPU 201 determines that the “second incorrect winning error” has occurred. In this case, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the occurrence of the "second incorrect winning error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the zeroth bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is "0", the notification corresponding to the "second incorrect prize error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203c.

  The “vibration detection error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that a vibration equal to or higher than a set value level is detected (detected) by a vibration sensor 208 a described later. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the ball entry is an important factor in determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and the ball is intentionally prevented from entering the ball entry. There is a need. Therefore, when vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, there is a request to stop the game. On the other hand, if the game is immediately stopped when the vibration is given, the game will be stopped even if the player in good intentions unexpectedly shakes the pachinko machine 10, and the player is There is a risk of distrust in the game arcade.

  Therefore, when the number of times the vibration above the set value level is given to the pachinko machine 10 is less than the predetermined number, only notification to the attendants of the game arcade by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, etc. "Vibration detection error" to be performed is generated.

  In this case, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. When the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the second bit of the memory 203c to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 has been eliminated based on the output of the vibration sensor 208 g, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c. To generate an error command and send it to the voice lamp controller 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the “vibration detection error” is released. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 executing the notification corresponding to the “vibration detection error” receives this error command, the voice lamp control device 113 ends the notification corresponding to the “vibration detection error”. As a result, it is possible to notify a staff member of the game arcade that the pachinko machine 10 is no longer vibrated. When the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is set to "1", the MPU 201 sets the first bit of the memory 203c to "0".

  It should be noted that "vibration detection error" is temporarily notified on models assuming a game in which the pachinko machine is given a certain degree of vibration, such as a game in which the display mode of the fluctuation effect is changed by continuous hitting and hitting of the presentation button. In such a case, a "vibration detection error" caused by the depression of the effect button occurs, and the notification becomes troublesome. Therefore, in such a model, it is difficult to adopt the "vibration detection error". Therefore, the determination result of the "vibration detection error" is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  Further, when it is determined by the MPU 201 that vibration more than the set value level is frequently given to the pachinko machine 10 from the output of the vibration sensor 208g, processing of “vibration stop error” is performed. In this case, an error command unique to the "vibration stop error" consisting of 2 bytes stored in an error command storage area (not shown) of the ROM 202 is fired via the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111. It transmits to the control device 112. As a result, the firing control device 112 stops the firing of the gaming ball and stops the game, and the voice lamp control device 113 drives the lamp or the speaker in a manner more noticeable than the "vibration detection error" The occurrence of an error is reported.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, there is no error allocated to the third to seventh bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and "0" is always stored in each of the bits. I am trying to Therefore, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh" generated based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, the values of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are all "0". It is a command.

  The main control unit 110 also determines the occurrence of occurrences of errors different in type from the errors described here, and the determination result is output to the first error determination buffer memory 203b and the second error determination buffer. It may be stored in the memory 203 c and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by an error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh”.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “front frame winning when opening error” is an error that occurs in the start winning switch 208b, but a similar error detects passage of the ball in the first large opening 65a. It is also conceivable that the first specific winning switch 208b and a general winning switch (not shown) for detecting passage of a ball in the general winning opening 63 may be generated in each of the switches provided in each winning opening. Therefore, the occurrence of the “front frame prize opening error” in each of these switches is also determined in the error determination processing, and the result is the bit area of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b or the second error. It may be stored in the bit area of the determination buffer memory 203c.

  At this time, even if one of the first or second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c is generated in any of the switches provided in each of the winning openings, an "error on opening of the front frame" is generated. The generation information may be allocated (turned on), and separate bits may be allocated to the “front frame winning opening error” of each winning switch, and the “front frame” of each winning switch Information on the occurrence of the winning opening error may be stored in separate bits.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "prize switch abnormal error" is also an error that occurs in the start winning switch 208b, but a similar error also occurs in the other switches provided in each winning opening. It is possible to do. Therefore, the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" in each of these switches is also determined in the error determination processing, and the result is displayed in the bit area of the first error determination buffer memory 203b or for the second error determination. It may be stored in the bit area of the buffer memory 203c.

  At this time, even if one bit of the first or second error determination buffer memory 203b or 203c is generated in any of the switches provided with the "winning switch abnormal error" in each winning opening, the error occurrence information May be assigned to be stored (turned on), and separate bits may be assigned to the "winning switch abnormal error" of each winning switch, and the "winning switch abnormal error" of each winning switch may be allocated. The generated information may be stored in separate bits.

  In addition, many models have at least one configuration similar to the first specific winning switch 208b and a general winning switch (not shown), and "the front frame winning in each one switch" Since "time opening error" and "winning switch abnormal error" can occur regardless of the game content and the game nature of each model, "front frame winning opening error" and "winning switch abnormality in each one switch" Information on the occurrence of “error” is stored in any bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b that stores occurrence information of errors that occur in many models, or the first error determination buffer memory 203b and A separate memory is provided to store information on the occurrence of errors that occur in many models, and each is stored in any bit of that memory Theft is desirable. The configuration of the pachinko machine and the game content, etc., the error command code of “front frame winning at prize opening error” and “winning switch abnormal error” in each one of the first specific winning switches 208 b and the general winning switches (not shown) This is because the programs can be used repeatedly when creating programs etc. of different game characteristics, and the creation of that model can be facilitated.

  Since there are many errors that store error occurrence information that occurs in many models, if the 1-byte first error determination buffer memory 203b can not cope with it, error occurrence information that occurs in many models is stored. Preferably, another memory is provided to store error occurrence information. In this case, the upper byte of the error command generated from the memory has a value different from “DDh” and “DEh” (for example, “DCh”).

  In addition, in the second type of pachinko machine, the item provided at the center of the game board is provided with a gate with a sensor for detecting passage of the ball, such as an entrance gate and an exit gate of the game ball, There is a V switch that generates a big hit when entering the ball. Even if a predetermined time has passed after passing through the entrance gate, if the ball entry at the V switch is not detected yet and there is no output of the discharge signal from the exit gate, the fraudster will be between the two gates. There is a possibility that the ball is operated illegally with a magnet or the like. Therefore, in such a case, the second type of pachinko machine generates an “ejection error”. Such an error peculiar to the second type pachinko machine is preferably assigned to the second error determination buffer memory 203c in which information on occurrence of an error according to the feature of the model is stored.

  In models that operate mechanical characters on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, etc., during demonstration display when a game is not being played, the mechanical character is positioned at a predetermined position if firing is performed poorly during operation of the mechanical characters. There is a risk that it will not be possible to return to the case, and in this case a "firing error" will occur. Since this is also an error specific to the machine type that operates the mechanical character during demonstration display, it is desirable to store error occurrence information in the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  In addition, since errors such as “induction lever error” and “solenoid operation error” are model-specific errors that generate the respective errors, the error occurrence information is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c. It is desirable to do.

  There are many errors according to the characteristics of the model, so if it can not be handled by the 1-byte second error judgment buffer memory 203c, another memory for storing error occurrence information according to the characteristics of the model is provided. It is desirable to store error occurrence information there. In this case, the upper byte of the error command generated from the memory has a value different from “DDh” and “DEh” (for example, “DFh”).

  The RAM 203 further has a bit check execution flag 203d. The bit check execution flag 203 d is a flag for transmitting an error command of the upper byte “DEh” from the main control unit 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The voice lamp control unit 113 which has received this error command It is used to confirm an abnormality of the wiring 302 described later.

  The bit check execution flag 203d is turned on in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) performed at the time of power on of the main control unit 110, and in the error determination process (S102, S711, FIG. 24) executed thereafter. It is a flag to be turned off.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, values corresponding to the detection results of the various sensors 208 in the error determination processing (S102, S711) are of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c. It is stored in each bit. In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 generates an error (error) in any bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b and any bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. To determine whether or not the information indicating the occurrence or cancellation of the error is stored, and if there is a bit storing the information indicating the occurrence status of the error, the error is based on the value of the memory having the bit A command is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  At this time, if the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, regardless of the presence or absence of an error detected by the various sensors 208, an error of the upper byte “DEh” based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203b. A command is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, it becomes possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to check the bit of this command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control unit 111, an audio lamp control unit 113, a first symbol display unit 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and opening and closing plates of large opening ports 65a and 650a. Solenoid 209 which consists of each large open mouth solenoid for driving to open and close each to the front side by using the lower side as an axis, and a solenoid for driving a motorized part, etc. is connected, and MPU 201 is connected to these through input / output port 205 On the other hand, it sends various commands and control signals.

  In the present embodiment, eight (eight bits) of parallel wires 301 and 302 are used to connect the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the sub-control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113. Signal lines. Thereby, various commands to be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the sub control apparatus can be transmitted as parallel data of 8 bits.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 10, switches and sensors included at least in various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The radio wave detection device 208 a is a sensor that detects that radio waves that cause various switches, various sensors, various MPUs, etc. to malfunction are provided in the pachinko machine 10, and are provided at a plurality of locations on the back surface of the game board 13. It is arranged. As described above, the radio wave detection device 208a irradiates radio waves to various MPUs, various switches, various sensors, etc. to cause each to malfunction and cause a big hit lottery or a ball payout to occur illegally. Used to monitor fraud.

  The radio wave detection device 208 a outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when detecting a radio wave of a level higher than the set value. When a radio wave at a level lower than the set value is detected, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is irradiated with radio waves.

  The start winning switch 208b is a switch for detecting passage of a ball at the first ball entrance (starting hole) 64, and while detecting a ball passing through the first ball entrance 64, the on signal is mainly used It outputs to the MPU 201 of the control device 110. On the other hand, when the ball is not detected, the off signal is output. Further, the first ball entry port 64 is attached to the back of the first ball entry port 64 (the back side of the game board 13).

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the ball has passed the first entrance 64. Specifically, an ON signal is output from the start winning switch 208b, and the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal (that is, detects an OFF input and an ON input successively), and then continues at least once. When the on input is detected, the MPU 201 determines that the ball is passing through the first entrance 64. Then, when the MPU 201 detects the off input within a predetermined time (maximum passage time of the ball, for example, 0.2 seconds) after detecting the rising of the on signal, the ball passes through the first entrance 64. It is determined that On the other hand, when the off input is not detected even if the maximum passage time of the sphere is exceeded, it is determined that the sphere is stagnant. At this time, notification of the above-mentioned "winning switch error" is performed.

  The first specific winning switch 208c is a switch for detecting passage of a ball in the first large opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, and detects a ball passing through the first large opening 65a. The on signal is output to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. When the ball is not detected at the first large opening 65a, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether or not the ball has passed (winning) in the first large opening 65a. In addition, the first specific winning switch 208c is attached to the back of the first large opening 65a (the back side of the game board 13).

  The second specified winning switch 208d is a switch for detecting passage of a ball in the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a, when detecting a ball passing through the second large opening 650a, The on signal is output to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Further, when the ball is not detected at the second large opening port 650a, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether the ball has passed (winning) in the second large opening 650a. Further, the second specified winning switch 208d is attached to the back of the second large opening 65a (the back side of the game board 13).

  The front frame open switch 208 e is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the front frame 14. The front frame open switch 208 e outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the open (non-closed) state of the front frame 14 is detected. On the other hand, when the closing (non-opening) of the front frame 14 is detected, the off signal is output. Thus, the MPU 201 can determine whether the front frame 14 is open or closed. The front frame opening switch 208e is provided on the cylinder lock 20, and is turned on when the front frame 14 is unlocked and turned off when the front frame 14 is locked.

  The inner frame opening switch 208 f is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12. The inner frame open switch 208 f outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the open (non-closed) state of the inner frame 12 is detected. On the other hand, when the closing (non-opening) of the inner frame 12 is detected, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 respectively. The inner frame open switch 208f is provided on the cylinder lock 20, and is turned on when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and turned off when the inner frame 12 is locked.

  The vibration sensor 208 g is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 and is disposed on the back of the game board 13. As described above, the vibration sensor 208g is used to monitor the fraudulent action of changing the flow of the ball by vibration and intentionally entering the ball entrance.

  The vibration sensor 208 g outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the level of vibration given to the pachinko machine 10 is the set value level. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is being vibrated at the set value level.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14, the correspondence between the signal output from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 and the bit value of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  First, referring to FIG. 11, the correspondence between the signal output from radio wave detection device 208a to MPU 201 and the value of the 0th bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. Explain. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201. FIG. 11B is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows a temporal change of the value of the 0th bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, when the radio wave detection device 208a detects a radio wave of a predetermined value level and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal. Then, "1" indicating that the "radio wave detection error" has occurred is set to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Accordingly, the upper byte is set to "DDh" and the value of the zeroth bit of the lower byte is set to "1" by the error determination processing (S102) executed when the rising of the on signal from the radio wave detection device 208a is detected. An error command to be generated is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "radio wave detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, in the period other than the above timing, the value of the zeroth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0". When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the 0th bit of the lower byte in the command becomes "0".

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the signal output from front frame open switch 208e to MPU 201 and the third and fourth bits of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. The correspondence with each value of is described.

  FIG. 12A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208 e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 12B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. FIG. 12C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the third bit of the buffer memory 203b. FIG. 12C is the fourth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, when the front frame open switch 208e detects the open state of the front frame 14 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 causes the ON signal to rise. At the detected timing, "1" indicating that "front frame opening detection error" has occurred is set in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Here, the value of the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0" in a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the front frame open switch 208e falls from the on signal to the off signal. Maintained.

  Therefore, when the rising of the on signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination processing (S 102), and the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte Is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "front frame opening detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the closed state of the front frame 14 and outputs the off signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the fall of the on signal to the off signal at the timing when the fall is detected. In the fourth bit of the memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "front frame opening detection error" has been eliminated. As described above, the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" during a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the front frame open switch 208e rises to the on signal. Ru.

  Therefore, when the fall to the off signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination process (S 102), and sets the third and fourth bits of the lower byte. An error command having a value of “0, 1” is generated, and this command notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the elimination of “front frame opening detection error”.

  Thus, in the error determination process (S102) of the main control unit 110, "1" indicating that the front frame 14 is in the open state is set in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and The fourth bit of the memory 203b is not set to "1" indicating that the front frame 14 is in the closed state. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, in which the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the third and fourth bits of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13, the first error set in MPU 201 based on the signal output from front frame open switch 208e to MPU 201, the signal output from start winning switch 208b to MPU 201, and those signal outputs. The correspondence with the value of the first bit of the determination buffer memory 203b will be described.

  FIG. 13 (a) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 13 (b) is a timing chart of signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201. 13C is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. .

  As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c), in the state where the front frame open switch 208e detects the open state of the front frame 14 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the start winning is further achieved. When the switch 208 b detects a ball passing through the first entrance 64 and the ON signal is output, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal at the timing when the ON signal is detected. Set “1” in 1 bit to indicate that “Folding error when opening front frame” has occurred.

  In addition, since the start winning switch 208b detects the ball passing through the first entrance 64 for a long time and the output of the on signal to the MPU 201 continues, the front frame 14 is opened, When the ON signal is output from the front frame opening switch 208e, the MPU 201 also has a "winning error when opening the front frame" in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b even at the timing when the rising of the ON signal is detected. Set "1" to indicate that it has occurred.

  When the MPU 201 simultaneously detects the rising of the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b and the rising of the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208e, the first error determination buffer memory 203b is also selected. Set “1” in 1 bit to indicate that “Folding error when opening front frame” has occurred.

  When "1" is set to the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, an error command is generated in which the upper byte is "DDh" and the value of the first bit of the lower byte is "1". The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "winning error when opening the front frame" by the command.

  On the other hand, the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" during a period other than the above timing. When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the first bit of the lower byte in the command is "0".

  As for the “front frame opening prize error” whose occurrence status is indicated by the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b, as described above, the front frame 14 is in the open state (opened state And the front frame 14 is closed, and at least it does not occur at the timing when the signal from the front frame open switch 208 e falls from on to off. For this reason, in the error determination process (S102), when “1” indicating that “the front frame opening prize error” has occurred is set in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, At the same time, the fourth bit of the memory 203 b is not set to “1” indicating that the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, in which the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Referring to FIG. 14, the correspondence between the signal output from start winning switch 208b to MPU 201 and the value of the second bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. Explain the relationship. FIG. 14A is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, and FIG. 14B is for the first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows temporal change of the value of the 2nd bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the start winning switch 208b detects a ball passing through the first entrance 64 and outputs an ON signal, and the ON signal is detected by the MPU 201. If the ON input is maintained until 0.2 s elapses from the time when the MPU 201 detects that the 0.2 s elapse, the “winning switch abnormality error” is generated in the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Set “1” to indicate that has occurred. Therefore, when the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b is maintained for 0.2 s from the rising edge, the upper byte is set to “DDh” by the error determination processing (S102) executed at the timing when the 0.2 s elapses. An error command in which the value of the second bit of the lower byte is “1” is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of “winning switch abnormal error” by this command.

  On the other hand, the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is maintained at “0” during a period other than the above timing. Therefore, when an error command of the upper byte “DDh” is transmitted in such a period, the value of the second bit of the lower byte in the command becomes “0”.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, the signal output from inner frame open switch 208f to MPU 201 and the fifth and sixth bits of first error determination buffer memory 203c set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. The correspondence with each value of is described.

  FIG. 15A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f to the MPU 201, and FIG. 15B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. FIG. 15C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the fifth bit of the buffer memory 203c. FIG. 15C is the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, when the inner frame open switch 208f detects the open state of the inner frame 12 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal. At timing, "1" indicating that "inner frame open detection error" has occurred is set to the 5th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Here, in the period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f falls from the on signal to the off signal, “0” is given to the value of the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Maintained.

  Therefore, when the rising of the on signal from the inner frame opening switch 208f is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to "DDh" by the error determination process (S102), and the values of the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte Is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "inner frame opening detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, when the inner frame opening switch 208f detects the closed state of the inner frame 12 and outputs the off signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the fall of the on signal to the off signal at a timing when the first error determination buffer is detected. In the sixth bit of the memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "inner frame open detection error" has been eliminated. Here, “0” is maintained as the value of the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b during a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f rises to the on signal.

  Therefore, when a fall from the inner frame opening switch 208 f to the off signal is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination process (S 102), and sets the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte. An error command having a value of “0, 1” is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the elimination of the “inner frame opening detection error” by this command.

  Thus, in the error determination process (S102) of main controller 110, "1" indicating that inner frame 12 is in the open state is set to the fifth bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b and The sixth bit of the memory 203 b is not set to “1” indicating that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, wherein the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Next, referring to FIG. 16, the opening timing of the first large opening 65a (that is, the timing of driving the opening and closing plate of the first large opening 65a by the first large opening solenoid) and the first large opening Correspondence between the signal output from the first specific winning switch 208c for detecting the ball passing through 65a to the MPU 201 and the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 based on the signal output Explain the relationship.

  FIG. 16 (a) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening 65a and the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, and FIG. 16 (b) is the first specific winning switch 208c. FIG. 16C is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the MPU 201 to the MPU 201, and FIG. 16C shows the time of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows a typical change.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the MPU 201 instructs the first large open port solenoid to alternately open and close the first large open port 65a for a predetermined period of time, for a predetermined period after the occurrence of the big hit, The opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a is repeated. At this time, in the pachinko machine 10, after a period of time after the occurrence of the jackpot has passed and a period in which the first large opening 65a alternately repeats opening and closing has passed, it takes a large opening (for example, 2 seconds) It is set as the effective passage period of the ball in the mouth 65a. The effective passage period is a period in which the ball whose passage to the first large opening 65a is detected is treated as a ball that has passed by a normal game. This takes a while for the MPU 201 to command the closing of the first large opening 65a and the first large opening 65a is completely closed, during which time the ball takes the first large opening 65a. It is because it may pass. For this reason, the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a is sufficiently longer than the period until the first large opening 65a is completely closed after the MPU 201 instructs the end of the opening / closing operation. It has become a thing.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (c), during the period other than the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a, the first specified winning switch 208c passes the ball in the first large opening 65a. When the MPU 201 detects an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 generates a “first fraudulent winning error” in the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b at the timing when the rising of the ON signal is detected. Set "1" to indicate. As a result, in the period other than the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a, the error judgment processing (S102) executed when the rising of the on signal from the first specific winning switch 208c is detected An error command is generated in which the byte is "DDh" and the value of the seventh bit of the lower byte is "1", and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "first incorrect prize error" by this command.

  On the other hand, in the period other than the above timing, the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is maintained at “0”. When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the seventh bit of the lower byte in the command becomes "0".

  The 0th bit of the second specified winning opening 650a and the second error determination buffer memory 203c is also similar to the 7th bit of the first specified winning opening 65a and the first error determination buffer memory 203b. And I omit the explanation.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light from a lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and controls the main controller 110. Based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received more, control such as setting of the fluctuation mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed in the fluctuation time is executed. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 stores a program for executing notification corresponding to the error command whose reception has been confirmed, using the 7-segment display 37 b, a lamp, and a speaker. Although details will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the MPU 221 analyzes the upper byte of the received error command stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the received error command is main control Whether the error command includes in the lower byte information indicating the occurrence status of multiple types of errors generated using the first error determination buffer memory 203 b or the second error determination buffer memory 203 c of the device 110 Determine.

  When it is determined by the MPU 221 that the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors in the lower byte, the MPU 221 Bit (a set of 1st and 2nd bits, or each of 1st and 3rd bytes, 1st and 4th bytes, 3rd and 4th bytes, 5th and 6th bytes) Based on the set of bits), it is determined whether the received error command is an incorrect command.

  The abnormal command here means the command generated by the main control unit 110 due to the influence of wiring abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit in the wiring 302 or noise mixing in the wiring 302 etc. This is a command whose content has been changed in the process of transmission and reception of commands between the device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 32, but this determination is made by using a specific 1-bit value and another specific 1-bit value that constitute the lower byte of the received error command. However, this is performed by confirming whether the combination can not be set by the error determination processing (S102) as described above.

  When it is determined that the received error command is normal, notification based on the received error command is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received error command is abnormal, notification based on the received error command is not performed. As a result, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously notified, and the reliability of the error notification can be enhanced.

  The RAM 223 has a holding ball number counter 223a. The holding ball number counter 223a is, like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203 a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the number holding ball counter 223a.

  Specifically, in the case of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variation effect is added by entering the first entrance ball 64, and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main control unit 110 included in the pending ball number command (ie, pending at the main control unit 110 The stored ball number of the variable effect) is stored in the stored ball number counter 223a (see S1107 in FIG. 30).

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is transmitted along with the reception. If the mode of the variable display in the display device 81 is set, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1207 in FIG. 34). As described above, since the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the holding ball number counter 223 a is used to light the holding lamp 85. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 lights and displays the holding lamp 85 by the same number as the value indicated by the holding ball number counter 223a. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of holding balls. Further, as described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is changed while being synchronized with the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of the hold lamps 85 to be lit and displayed in synchronization with the value of the hold counter 403a of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of holding balls can be accurately displayed by the holding lamp 85.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e. The first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e are counters for storing the number of abnormal error commands received by the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 It is used to determine that there is a possibility that a wiring abnormality (disconnection, short circuit, etc.) of the wiring 302 to be connected may occur.

  The first wiring abnormality determination counter 223 b is an error command of the upper byte “DDh”, and the value of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is an abnormal combination (that is, a combination of “1, 1”). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and in the combination where the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are incorrect (that is, the combination of "1, 1"). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The third wiring abnormality determination counter 223 d is an error command of the upper byte “DDh”, and in the combination where the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte are not normal (that is, the combination of “1, 1”). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 d is an error command of the upper byte “DEh”, and in the combination (ie, the combination of “1, 1”) in which the values of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte are incorrect. It is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte “DEh”, and the value of those bits is cleared to 0 when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  In all of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e, "0" is set as an initial value in the initial value setting process (S910, see FIG. 22) in the start-up process at the time of power on. Ru.

  Here, an error command in which the combination of specific bits is not normal (simply referred to as an incorrect error command) is noise to the wiring 302 in addition to the wiring abnormality such as the short circuit of the wiring 302 as described above. Is a command that the audio lamp control device 113 may receive due to the mixing.

  Here, since mixing of noise into the wire 302 is irregular as to which part (wire) of the wire 302 is loaded, it is an irregular phenomenon that it affects which bit of the error command. On the other hand, since a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in the wiring 302 is a continuous phenomenon in a part or all of the wiring 302, if an abnormality such as a short circuit occurs in a part of the wiring corresponding to a specific bit. Then, until the wiring abnormality is resolved, certain bits in the error command may continue to be a combination of incorrect values.

  Therefore, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, one of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e has a value equal to or greater than the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment). In this case, that is, when the combination of the specific 2-bit values is an incorrect error command and the same type is received three consecutive times, it is determined that the wiring abnormality has occurred.

  When the wiring abnormality is judged by the MPU 221, the fact is notified in a mode different from various errors. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Furthermore, the RAM 223 has a bit check execution flag 223f. The bit check execution flag 223 f is a flag for indicating whether abnormality confirmation of the wiring 302 or the various switches 208 is performed, which is performed using an error command transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is.

  The bit check execution flag 223f is turned on in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) performed when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on, and the voice lamp control device 113 generates an error command of the upper byte "DEh" This flag is turned off in the error-time operation execution process (S1109, FIG. 31) described later when the power is received for the first time after power-on.

  Although the details will be described later, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 executes an error determination process (see FIG. 24) and transmits it by an error command of the upper byte “DEh”. As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control unit 110 at this time has no error assignment in the third to seventh bits, and the value of each bit is "0". Is the command to be set.

  Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, if any one of the third to seventh bits is "1", the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 In other words, there is a possibility that abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit has occurred in the wiring 302. In this case, it can be considered that commands other than the error command are not properly transmitted and received due to the wiring abnormality.

  Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 receives an error command of the upper byte “DEh” for the first time after the power is turned on, that is, the bit check execution flag 223f is on. If the value of the third bit to the seventh bit of the command is “1”, it is determined that “1” indicates that the wiring 302 has an abnormality. It is supposed that the notification is given on the assumption that there is a possibility that In this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state in which the wiring 302 has an abnormality.

  A variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variation effect pending in the main control device 110 is at most 4 It is a counter that counts up to times.

  The RAM 223 additionally shows a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. Also, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1104 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1202 in FIG. 34).

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 is a device for controlling the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and is a variation display of the third symbol (variation effect), a special effect shown in FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 performs various screen displays such as a screen to be displayed when the first or second large opening 65a 650a opens and closes, a screen to notify the end of the jackpot in 2R or later in the aspect or the special aspect 2 It controls according to the command transmitted from (main controller 110111).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command and other various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory storing compressed data (character information) such as a symbol (a background symbol or a third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed form in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the plurality of decompressed characters It is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data of one frame generated using at least a part of character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 ms). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then start-up processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process, first, read processing of various winning switches such as the start winning switch 208b and the first and second specified winning switches 208c and 208d is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the states of the switches 208 other than the various winning switches are also read, and an error determination process is performed to determine whether an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (S102). That is, based on the states of the various switches 208, it is determined whether or not various errors occur, and an error command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the occurrence of an error based on the determination result. Generate The details of the error determination process (S102) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S104). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, processing for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and variation processing for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S105), and further, the first ball entry opening The start-up winning process accompanying the winning to 64 is executed (S106). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S107), and the other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S108), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, the variation process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S105). This fluctuation process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (S201). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), since the variable display can not be performed, the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S203: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S203, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) It is judged whether or not is larger than 0 (S204), and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is not 0 (S204: No), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S205), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is subjected to shift processing (S206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area toward the execution area, and the first pending area → the execution area, the second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S207), and this process is ended as it is. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is 0 (S204: No), a state in which demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, ie, It is determined whether or not a demo is in progress (S208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine that the interval is under demonstration.

  Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S208: No), a demo command is set (S209), and this processing is ended, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration command can be set to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S211), and the present process is ended.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S212). The setting of the stop symbol of the first symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, in the variation start process (S207), it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area by the process of S206. In the case, the jackpot type is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Then, as the stop display of the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit, the stop symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is set, and in the case of the release, the stop symbol corresponding to the release is set.

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S212, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 In order to make the decision, a decision command is set (S213), and this processing ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the fluctuation start process (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S207). This variation start process (S207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area While making a big hit lottery and small hitting determination, it decides the production pattern (the fluctuation time) of the fluctuation production which is done with the 1st design indicator 37 and the 3rd design indicator 81.

  In the change start process, first, a big hit lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area (S301). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, “7, 307, 582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table becomes the jackpot random number value, and the pachinko machine 10 If the game state of is a high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322," corresponding to the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined that it is a jackpot Do.

  When it is determined as a result of the process of S301 that it is a big hit (S301: Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area And the display mode (stop symbol) at the time of jackpot is set based on that (S302). In this process, the first symbol display device is based on the jackpot type set by the first hit classification counter C2 and the jackpot type table, that is, 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot The stop symbol of 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) and the stop symbol of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S303). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the variation pattern table selected by the jackpot type determined in the process of S302. As described above, the first variation pattern table is selected when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and the second variation pattern table is selected when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is associated is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be started from now.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S301 (S301: No), it is determined that the game is out, and a display mode (stop symbol) at the time of removal is set (S307). In the process of S307, the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, As a stop type (stop symbol) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front / back outreach, a reach other than back / front out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. ing.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of out of step is determined (S308). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the variation pattern table selected based on various conditions. Here, if the stop type of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the process of S307 is the reach other than the front-rear outreach or the front-rear outset, the third variation pattern table is selected, and the third symbol display apparatus 81 If the stop type is completely out, the fourth variation pattern table for time saving or the fourth variation pattern table for non-time reduction is selected. The fourth variation pattern table for time reduction is selected when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state (including the probability variation (the high probability state of the third symbol) when the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased) If the game arcade of the machine 10 is other than that, the non-time-shortening fourth variation pattern table is selected. Then, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is associated is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be started from now.

  When the process of S303 or S308 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S303 or S308 is set (S309). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S302 or S307 is set (S310), and the fluctuation start process is ended. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S801 of the main process (FIG. 23). Ru.

  Next, the start winning process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S106). The start winning process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and if there is a starting winning From the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters, the permission judgment process of starting the continuous preview effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation effect being held in the main control unit 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S402). And if there is no winning at the first ball entry 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning at the first ball entering 64, if the number of operation holding balls is not N <4 (S402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the number of holding balls N <4 (S402: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the step S103 is added to the vacant reserve area of the reserve sphere storage area of the RAM 203. It stores in the first area (S404).

  Next, a pending ball count command including the value N of the pending ball count counter 203a updated by the process of S403 is created and set (S405). The holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S801 of the main process (FIG. 23). The sound lamp control device 113 updates the holding series counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the holding ball number N included in the holding ball number command, and the holding lamps for the number indicated by the holding series counter 223a. Display 85 lit.

  Then, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout and emission control device 311 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S701). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S704), and if it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S713. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). If not stored (S705: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S713 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S713. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S812 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S713, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S713). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmission of the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S714, S715) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S714, S715) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 714, S 715) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S714, S715), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S714), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S715). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to the process of S711.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S707: Yes, while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the occurrence information of power-off (S708), and then clear the first and second error judgment buffer memories 203b and 203c to 0 (initialization) And the process proceeds to the process of S710 (S709).

  In the process of S710, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S710). Although details will be described later, it is possible to generate an error command of the upper byte “DEh” and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 113 in an error determination process (S711) executed subsequent to the process of S711. The details of the process of S711 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S711, the interrupt is permitted (S712), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S801 to S805 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S808 and S809 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device The external output process to be sent to is executed (S801).

  Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command, the determination command, and the large open ports 65a and 650a are opened and closed by this external output processing. The notification command A, notification command B, probability command, round number command, ending command A, ending command B, etc. necessary to display various screens on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. . In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S803), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the first large prize of the first variable winning device 65 A large opening opening / closing process is executed to open or close each of the opening 65a and the second large opening 65a of the second variable winning device 650 (S804). That is, the large open port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum open time of the large open port 65a has passed or whether the ball has won a specified number of balls in the large open port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the large open port 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the large open port 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S805). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S806), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S806: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S807) If the predetermined time has already passed (S807: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described S801 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S807: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S808, S809).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S808). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S802 (S809).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S801 to S805 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Also, in the process of S806, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S806: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 21 has been executed, so the process at the time of the power-off after S810 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S810), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S811). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S812), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S813), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S806 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change of the state of the game performed in S801 to S805, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S808 and S809 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S801. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S801. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S801. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, error determination processing (S102, S711) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this error determination process (S102). This error determination process (S102, S711) is a process executed in each process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the start-up process (see FIG. 22) described later, and the state of the various switches 208 Based on the above, the occurrence status of various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is determined, an error command is generated based on the determination result, and the generated error command is set in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203. Do.

  In the error determination process (S102, S711), first, the radio wave detection process for determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "radio wave detection error" is executed (S501).

  Here, the details of the radio wave detection process (S501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing the radio wave detection process (S501). In the radio wave detection processing, first, it is determined whether or not the radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection device 208 a by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208 a input to the MPU 201. (S520). As described above, the radio wave detection device 208a outputs an ON signal when a radio wave of a predetermined value level is detected, and outputs an OFF signal when no radio wave is detected.

  Therefore, if the rising edge of the ON signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 determines that the radio wave detection device 208a detects a radio wave and generates a “radio wave detection error” (S520) Yes: "1" is set to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (S521). Thereby, information indicating that a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection device 208a, that is, a determination result that a "radio wave detection error" has occurred is stored in the bit. Thereafter, the radio wave detection process (S501) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, if it is not the timing when the rise of the on signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201 (S520: No), the radio wave detection process (S501) is ended and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). Each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is cleared to 0 at the start of the error determination process (S102) by the process of S512 described later. Therefore, in this case, "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes a winning switch abnormality determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "winning switch abnormal error" (S502).

  Here, the details of the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 (b) is a flowchart showing the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502). In the winning switch abnormality determination processing, first, detection information of the ball at the first entrance (starting opening) 64 for each timer interrupt processing, which is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed Winning detection information) is acquired (S530), and it is determined whether the ON state of the start winning switch 208b is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) based on the detection information (S531) .

  Since the predetermined time is set to a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the ON state of the start winning switch 208b continues for a predetermined time (0.2 s). If it is determined that the switch has been detected (S531: Yes), as described above, there is a possibility that the start winning switch 208b may be broken, or that the switch 208b may be tampered with. Therefore, in this case, the MPU 201 sets "1" to the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and stores the determination result that the above-mentioned "winning switch error" has occurred (S532). Thereafter, the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, if the start winning switch 208b is in the OFF state, or the on time of the start winning switch 208b is less than the predetermined time (0.2 seconds) or exceeds the predetermined time by the MPU 201. When it is determined (S531: No), the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes front frame opening determination processing to determine the occurrence of the above-described "front frame opening error" (S503).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 25C, details of the front frame opening determination process (S503) will be described. FIG. 25C is a flowchart showing the front frame opening determination process (S503). In the front frame opening determination process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the front frame 14 is in the open state by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the front frame opening switch 208 e. It discriminates (S540). As described above, the front frame opening switch 208e outputs the on signal when the front frame 14 is in the open state, and outputs the off signal when the front frame 14 is in the closed state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the front face frame 14 is in the open state (S540: Yes), "1" is set to the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, whereby the front face frame 14 is set to the front face. Information indicating that the frame 14 has been opened, that is, a "front frame open error" has occurred, is stored (S541). At this time, when the front frame 14 is closed, “0” is stored in the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b in which “1” is stored. Thereafter, the front frame opening determination process (S503) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  When it is determined that it is not the timing when the front frame 14 is opened but the timing when the on signal from the front frame opening switch 208e rises by the processing of S540 (S540: No), the processing proceeds to S542. The MPU 201 determines whether or not the fall from the on signal to the off signal is input from the front frame open switch 208 e, and thereby determines whether it is the timing when the front frame 14 is in the closed state. (S542).

  If it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state by the process of S 542 (S 542: Yes), it means that the “front frame open error” has been eliminated, so the fourth error determination buffer memory 203 b Set "1" to the bit (S543). Thus, information indicating that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, that is, that the “front frame open error” has been eliminated, is stored in the bit. At this time, "0" is stored in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Thereafter, the front frame opening determination process (S503) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Further, in the process of S 542, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the falling edge to OFF of the signal input from the front frame open switch 208 e is not input to the MPU 201 and the front frame 14 is closed. (S542: No), the front frame opening determination process (S503) ends, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, “0” is stored in both the third bit and the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes a front frame open prize determination process that determines the occurrence of the above-mentioned "front frame open win error" (S504).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26 (a), the details of the win determination processing (S504) when the front frame is opened will be described. FIG. 26 (a) is a flowchart showing the winning determination processing (S504) when the front frame is open. In the front frame opening prize determination process (S504), first, the front frame 14 is determined by determining whether the input signal from the front frame opening switch 208e input to the MPU 201 is an on signal or an off signal. Is determined whether it is in the open state (S550).

  If it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the open state by the process of S550 (S550: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S551, and the ball at the first entrance (starting opening) 64 for each timer interrupt process With reference to the detection information (winning detection information), it is determined whether or not the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the start winning switch 208b (S551). If it is determined that the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the process of S551 (S551: Yes), "1" is set to the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. (S552). Thereby, the determination result that the "front frame opening winning error" has occurred is stored in the bit. Then, the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (that is, is in the closed state) by the process of S550 (S550: No), or it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the open state by the process of S550 ( S550: Yes, if it is determined that the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is not detected in the subsequent S551 processing (S551: No), the front frame opening prize determination processing (S504) is ended as it is Then, the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, "0" is stored in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes an inner frame opening determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "inner frame opening error" (S505).

  Here, the details of the inner frame opening determination process (S505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the inner frame opening determination process (S505). In the inner frame opening determination process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the inner frame 12 is in the open state by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208 f. It discriminates (S560). As described above, the inner frame opening switch 208f outputs the on signal when the inner frame 12 is in the open state, and outputs the off signal when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state (S 560: Yes), "1" is set to the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, whereby the bit is Information indicating that the frame 12 has been opened, that is, an "inner frame opening error" has occurred, is stored (S561). At this time, when the inner frame 12 is closed, “0” is stored in the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b in which “1” is stored. Thereafter, the inner frame opening determination process (S505) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  When it is determined that it is not the timing at which the on-frame signal from the inner frame opening switch 208f rises but the timing at which the inner frame 12 is opened (S560: No), the process proceeds to S562. The MPU 201 determines whether or not the falling from the on signal to the off signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208f, and thereby determines whether it is the timing when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state. (S562).

  If it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state by the process of S 562 (S 562: Yes), it means that the “inner frame open error” has been eliminated, so the sixth error detection buffer memory 203 b Set "1" to the bit (S563). Thereby, information indicating that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, that is, that the "inner frame opening error" has been eliminated is stored in the bit. At this time, “0” is stored in the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Thereafter, the inner frame opening determination process (S505) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Further, in the process of S 562, when it is determined that the falling edge of the signal input from the inner frame opening switch 208 f is not input to the MPU 201 and it is not the timing when the inner frame 12 is closed. (S562: No), the inner frame opening determination process (S505) ends, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, "0" is stored in both the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes an illegal prize determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "incorrect prize error" (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), the details of the incorrect prize determination process (S506) will be described. FIG. 27 (a) is a flowchart showing the unfair prize determination process (S506). In the incorrect prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred by the processes of S560 to S562, and the "second incorrect prize error" occurs by the processes of S563 to S565. It is determined whether the

  First, referring to ball detection information (winning detection information) at the first large opening 65a for each timer interrupt processing, which is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed, It is determined whether or not a ball passing through the one large opening port 65a is detected (S560).

  If it is determined that the ball passing through the first large opening 65a is detected in the process of S560 (S560: Yes), whether or not it is an effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a described above (S561). If it is determined that it is not an effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a (S561: No), "1" is set to the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and "first incorrect prize error" The determination result that "is generated" is stored (S562), and the process proceeds to the processing of S563.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing through the first large opening 65a is not detected by the process of S560 (S560: No), the processes of S561 and S562 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S563. Do. When it is determined in the process of S561 that it is the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a (S561: Yes), the process of S562 is skipped to shift to the process of S563. In these cases, "0" is stored as the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  In the processing of S563, the detection information (winning detection information) of the ball in the second large opening 650a for each timer interrupt processing is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed. It is determined whether a ball passing through the second large opening port 650a is detected.

  If it is determined that the ball passing through the second large opening port 650a is detected in the process of S563 (S563: Yes), it is determined whether it is an effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening port 650a. (S564). If it is determined that the effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening port 650a is not (S564: No), "0" is set to the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and the "second fraudulent prize error" The determination result that "is generated" is stored (S565). Then, the incorrect winning determination process (S506) is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing through the second large opening 650a is not detected in the process of S563 (S563: No), the respective processes of S564 and S565 are skipped, and the unfair prize judgment process as it is The (S506) ends. Further, if it is determined in the process of S564 that it is the effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening 650a (S564: Yes), the process of S565 is skipped and the illegal prize determination process (S506) is ended. Do. In these cases, "0" is stored as the value of the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes vibration detection processing to determine the occurrence of the “vibration detection error” and the “vibration stop error” described above (S507).

  Here, the details of the vibration detection process (S507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (b) is a flowchart showing the vibration detection process (S507). In the vibration detection process (S507), first, the MPU 201 determines whether vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the vibration sensor 208g (S570). ). As described above, the vibration sensor 208g outputs an on signal when a vibration at a set value level is detected, and outputs an off signal when the detected vibration level becomes less than the set value level.

  If it is determined in the process of S570 that the rise of the on signal is input from the vibration sensor 208g (S570: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the vibration detection counter (not shown) (S571), and the value after addition It is determined whether the value is for stopping the game (S572). The vibration detection counter is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of vibrations given by the pachinko machine 10, and is initialized when the power is turned on.

  If it is determined that the value of the vibration detection counter is a value for stopping the game, the process proceeds to S 573, and a command corresponding to “vibration stop error” is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 202, and the command Are set in the command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S573), and the process returns to the error determination process (S102, S711).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S572 that the value of the vibration detection counter is less than the value for stopping the game (S572: No), the process proceeds to S574 and the second error determination buffer memory 203c "1" is set to the 0th bit, thereby storing the determination result that "vibration detection error" is generated in the bit (S574), and the vibration detection processing (S507) is ended. At this time, "0" is stored in the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c that stores the determination result that the "vibration detection error" has been cancelled.

  Return to S570 and continue the explanation. When it is determined that the rising of the on signal is not input from the vibration sensor 208g by the process of S570 (S570: No), it is determined whether or not the falling from the on signal to the off signal is input (S570: S575). If it is determined that the falling to the off signal is input (575: Yes), the MPU 201 sets “1” to the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and performs the error determination process (S102, Return to S711).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fall to the off signal is not input (575: No), the process returns to the error determination process (S102, S711) as it is. In this case, “0” is stored in both the first bit and the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. After the vibration detection process 507, the MPU 201 executes each error detection process. That is, when information is not stored in the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c and other errors occur, it is detected, and an error command corresponding to the occurred error is transmitted to the ring for command transmission of the RAM 203. It sets to a buffer (not shown) (S508).

  Next, it is determined whether the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S509).

  As described above, since the bit check flag 203d is turned on in the step (S710) immediately before the error determination process (S711) executed in the startup process, the first error determination process (S711) after the power is turned on. Then, it is determined that the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S509: Yes). In this case, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned off (S515), and the process proceeds to S513.

  In the process of S513, an error command is generated based on the value stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and is set in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203. At this time, a command in which the values of the upper byte "DDh" and the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are all set to "0" is generated.

  Next, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (S514), and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the error determination process (S711) executed in the startup process activated at the time of power on, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, regardless of the result of the processes in S506 and S507. , And the upper byte "DEh" and the third to seventh bits of the lower byte have an error command of "0".

  It returns to the process of S509 and continues description. If it is determined that the bit check execution flag 203d is turned off (that is, the error determination process is one of timer interrupt processes), the process proceeds to the process of S510 (S509: No). In the process of S510, it is determined whether or not information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated exists in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (in the present embodiment, “1” is set in any of the bits). It is determined whether or not it is stored (S510).

  When it is determined by the process of S510 that there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b ("1" is stored in any of the bits. (If it exists) (S510: Yes), the process proceeds to S511, and an error command is generated based on the value stored in each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and the command transmission ring of the RAM 203 is generated. It sets to a buffer (S511), and it transfers to the process of S512. The error command generated at this time is composed of two bytes of the upper byte, the value “DDh” unique to the error command, the lower byte (lower 8 bits), and the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S510 that there is no information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (“0” is stored in all bits) When it exists (S510: No), the process of S511 is skipped, and it transfers to the process of S512. In this case, an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is not generated by the error determination process (S102) being executed.

  In the process of S512, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c (in the present embodiment, “1” is included in any of the bits). Determine whether or not it is stored. Here, when it is determined that there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c ("1" in any of the 0th bit to the 3rd bit). (When S512 is stored) (S512: Yes), the process proceeds to S513, and based on the value stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" Are set in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203 (S513), and the process proceeds to S514. The error command generated at this time is 2 bytes of the upper byte, the value “DEh” unique to the error command, the lower byte (lower 8 bits), and the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. Configured

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c by the process of S512 ("0" is stored in all bits) If it is (S512: No), the process of S513 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S514. In this case, an error command of the upper byte "DEh" is not generated by the error determination process (S102) being executed.

  After shifting to the process of S514, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (S514), and the process is ended.

  As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DDh" and the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment executing the error determination process (S102) Since information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of different errors is included, it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors only by transmitting one error command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  Further, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment reflects the occurrence status of different types of errors in each bit of the lower byte at the timing at which an error occurs or disappears based on the detection results by the various switches 208. The generated error command is generated and stored in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203.

  Therefore, the error command in the command transmission ring buffer is occupied, as compared with the case where the error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of different types of errors is sequentially generated and transmitted regardless of the change in the occurrence status of the error. The proportion can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 23) can be further reduced, and the capacity occupied by the error command in the ring buffer for command transmission (not shown) can be compressed more efficiently. can do. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more preferably.

  Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S901). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1018 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current start-up process. It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S902). As described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1015 in FIG. 29), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1018. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1018 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S902: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1018 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S903).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S903: Yes), the process proceeds to S904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S903: No), the process proceeds to S908.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S903) is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (S903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S904. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1018 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S903: No), and the process proceeds to S908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S902: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1018, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power-off process is being executed. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S904). As a check method, first, “0F1h” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0F1h”, and if “0F1h”, it is determined that it is normal. The write and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0F1h”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S908, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S908). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1018 is performed (see S1017 in FIG. 29). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1018 is executed, the process of S908 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S 908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S 909), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S 910). In the process of S910, "0" is set as the initial value of each of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e.

  Next, interrupt permission is set (S 911), and the process shifts to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S908 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S908 through S906 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S 908: No), S 909, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S 910, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S 910). Then (S911), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S909 is that, when the process of S908 is reached through the processes of S904 to S906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S904. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the processing of S1001 has been executed last time (S1001), and 1 ms or more has elapsed. If not (S1001: No), the process proceeds to S1013 without performing the process of S1002 to S1012. S1002 to S1012 are processes related to display and sound setting (that is, setting of effects) in step S1001 to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1013 and the command determination processing of S1014 in a short cycle, while there is no Since the process of S1014 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S1013 is executed in a short cycle. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1001 (S1001: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1003 to S1014 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1002) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1009 described later (S1003), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1004). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1005 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1005, the customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1006). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 85 in accordance with the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1007). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces an expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, it may be a decision button for changing to an effect that can be possessed or selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. In addition, when the frame button 22 is not arrange | positioned, the process of S1007 is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1009), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1010). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1010, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1011), and then the counter update process is performed (S1012), and the process shifts to the process of S1013. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1009 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1010 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the counter updating process, the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated.

  In the process of S1013, in order to display the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command The variable display process, which is a process to be generated and set to transmit the generated command to the display control apparatus 114, is executed (S1013). Details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1014). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1014 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1015 (S1015: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are both turned on (S1017), and the power-off process is executed (S1018). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1019), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1015 (S1015: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1016) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1016: No), the process returns to S1001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1016: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a command determination process (S1014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1014). This command determination process (S1014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1101). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1101: Yes), the variation pattern type (variation time) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1102), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern in a variation display process (see FIG. 34) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. To be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1101: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1103). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1103: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1104), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 233 (S1105). Then, the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1103: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1106). Then, when it is determined that the holding ball number command is received (S1106: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (that is, held by the main control device 110) The number of balls held for variation effect) is extracted, and this is stored in the number of balls held counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1107). Then, the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S2008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a can be corrected and adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

  As a result of the process of S1106, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has not been received (S1106: No), it is then determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1108). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S1108: Yes), an error operation execution process is executed, a process corresponding to the received error command is performed (S1109), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the error operation execution process (S1109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the process of S1108, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1111), shift to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  The confirmation command received from main controller 110 is set as a display confirmation command by the process of S 1111 and is transmitted to display control device 114. In the display control device 114, when the display confirmation command is received, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed and displayed. Further, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1111 and transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a demo screen by receiving the display demo command.

  In addition, when a command not supported by the voice lamp control device 113 has been received, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display an error screen or execute a variation effect in a special mode that is not normally executed. A command to instruct the display of the error screen or the execution of the fluctuation effect according to the special mode is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, an error operation execution process (S1019) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this error operation execution process (S1019). This error operation execution process (S1019) is executed in the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, received from the main control device 110 Perform processing corresponding to the specified error command.

  In this error operation execution process (S1109), first, it is determined whether the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DDh", "DEh", or any other value (S1121). ).

  If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DDh" (S1121: "DDh"), the first error operation execution process (S1122) is executed.

  Here, the details of the first error operation execution process (S1122) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first error operation execution process (S1122). In the first error operation execution process (S1122), a process corresponding to the error command of the upper byte "DDh" received by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the first error operation execution process, it is first determined whether or not the combination of the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are improper (S1131). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DDh", the case where the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This is inconsistent with the third bit, which indicates that the front frame 14 is in the open state, and that the fourth bit indicates that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, and is executed by the main control unit 110. This is because the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102.

  If it is determined by the process of S1131 that the combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is abnormal (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132. In the process of S1132, 1 is added to the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b which is a counter corresponding to the third bit and the fourth bit (S1132), and the values of the second and third wiring abnormality counters 223c, 223d Is cleared (S1133), and the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b after addition is compared with the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment) by the process of S1134 (S1134).

  If the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is less than the determination threshold "3" (S1134: No) as a result of comparison by the process of S1134 (S1134: No), the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and the process Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is a value equal to or greater than “3” of the determination threshold as a result of comparison by the processing of S1134 (S1134: Yes), Notification is performed on the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 as there may be an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1135), and the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) End the process.

  Returning to the process of S1131, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is normal by the process of S1131 (S1131: No), the process proceeds to S1136 and the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S1136). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DDh", the case where the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This indicates that the first frame is open when the front frame 14 is open, and the first frame bit 14 is closed when the front frame 14 is closed. This is because it is a contradictory one, which is a combination that can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 executed by the main controller 110.

  If it is determined by the process of S1136 that the combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1136: Yes), the process proceeds to S1137. Then, 1 is added to the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c which is a counter corresponding to the first bit and the fourth bit (S1137), and the values of the first and third wiring abnormality counters 223b and 223d are cleared. (S1138), the process proceeds to S1134.

  In the process of S1134, the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c after the addition is compared with the determination threshold ("3" in this embodiment) as described above (S1134). As a result of comparison, if it is determined that the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c is a value less than "3" of the determination threshold (S1134: No), the process is returned to the operation at error operation (S1109) and processed. Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is determined to be the value of “3” or more of the determination threshold value by the process of S1134 (S1134: Yes), the possibility of the wiring abnormality occurring in the wiring 302 The notification is executed on the assumption that there is an error (S1135), and the process returns to the operation execution at error processing (S1109) and ends the processing.

  It returns to the process of S1136 and continues explanation. If it is determined by the process of S1136 that the combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is normal (S1136: No), the process proceeds to S1139, and the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S1139). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the case where the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte are both “1” is an incorrect combination. This is inconsistent with the fifth bit, which indicates that the inner frame 12 has been opened, and the sixth bit, which indicates that the inner frame 12 has been closed. This is because the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 to be executed.

  If it is determined by the process of S1139 that the combination of the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1139: Yes), the process proceeds to S1140. Then, 1 is added to the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d which is a counter corresponding to the fifth bit and the sixth bit (S1140), and the values of the first and second wiring abnormality counters 223b and 223c are cleared. (S1141), the process proceeds to S1134.

  In the process of S1134, as described above, the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d after addition is compared with the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment) (S1134). As a result of comparison, if it is determined that the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d is a value less than “3” of the determination threshold (S1134: No), the process is returned to the operation at error operation (S1109) and processed. Finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1134 that the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is a value equal to or greater than "3" of the determination threshold (S1134: Yes), the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and Notification is performed on the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 as an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1135), and the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process. Do.

  Returning to the process of S1139, the description will be continued. If it is determined by the process of S1139 that the combination of the value of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte is normal (S1139: No), the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 at this time receives a normal command. In the lower byte of the error command, the notification corresponding to the bit for which "1" is set is executed (S1142). Next, the first to third wiring abnormality counters 223b to 223d are all cleared to 0 (S1143), and the process returns to the error operation execution processing (S1109) to end the processing.

  As described above, in the first error operation execution process (S1122), the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte of the upper byte "DDh" error command by each process of S1131, S1136, and S1139 is In the error determination process (S102) executed by the main control unit 110, it is determined whether or not the combination is an improper combination that can not be set. Then, when it is determined that any two bits are in an incorrect combination, the error command is included in the command as an abnormal command affected by wiring abnormality or noise. Notification is not performed based on the information indicating the occurrence status of the error (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte).

  On the other hand, if it is determined through the processing of S1131, S1136, and S1139 that all combinations of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte are normal combinations (S1131: No, S1136: No, S1139 No: The error command is notified as a normal command based on information indicating an error occurrence status included in the command (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte). Therefore, the reliability of error notification can be increased.

  Also, if it is determined that the specific 2 bits of the lower byte are an incorrect combination three consecutive times in any one of S1131, S1136, and S1139, that is, three consecutive same two bits Only when an error command whose value is incorrect is received, the values of the first to third wiring abnormality judgment counters 223b to 223d become “3” or more, which is the judgment threshold value, and the wiring of S1135 is performed. It is informed that there is a high possibility of the wiring abnormality occurring at 302. While a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in a part of the wiring 302 is a phenomenon that continues until it is eliminated, while noise contamination in the wiring 302 affects which part (wire) of the wiring 302 Since this is an irregular phenomenon, this makes it possible to identify whether or not the cause of the error command being abnormal is noise or wiring abnormality, and the wiring abnormality that needs to be notified Only when the possibility of occurrence is high, notification to that effect can be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DEh" (S1121: "DEh"), the second error operation execution process (S1123) is executed.

  Here, the details of the second error operation execution process (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this second error operation execution process (S1123). In the second error operation execution process (S1123), a process corresponding to the error command of the upper byte "DEh" received by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the second error operation execution process, first, it is determined whether the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on (S1151). Here, when it is determined that the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on (S1151: Yes), the bit check execution flag 223f is turned off (S1152), and the upper rank generated in the start processing of the main control device 110 In the lower byte of the error command of the byte "DEh", whether or not the wiring 302 is abnormal is determined by determining whether "0" is set in all the third to seventh bits. The determination is made (S1153). As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" is generated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 as a command in which all the values of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are fixed to "0". For this reason, if “1” is set to any of the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte according to the determination in S1153 (S1153: Yes), a wiring abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wiring 302. There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case (S1153: Yes), notification about wiring abnormality is executed (S1154). After that, the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that "0" is set to all the third to seventh bits in the process of S1153 (S1153: No), the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109). End the process.

  It returns to the process of S1151 and continues description. If it is determined by the process of S1151 that the bit check execution flag 223f is turned off (S1151: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1155, and the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the lower byte It is determined whether the value of the second bit is an incorrect combination (S1155). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh", the case where the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This indicates that the level (intensity) of the vibration detected by the vibration sensor 208g is a notification level at the first bit, while the level of the vibration detected by the vibration sensor 208g at the second bit This is because the (intensity) is contradictory, indicating that the level does not reach the notification level, and the combination is impossible in the normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 executed by the main control device 110.

  If it is determined by the process of S1155 that the combination of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1155: Yes), the process proceeds to S1156. In the processing of S1156, 1 is added to the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e which is a counter corresponding to the first bit and the second bit (S1156), and the processing of S1157 continues the fourth wiring abnormality after the addition. The value of the determination counter 223f is compared with the determination threshold ("3" in the present embodiment) (S1157).

  As a result of comparison by the processing of S1157, if the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e is a value smaller than "3" of the determination threshold (S1157: No), the process returns to the operation execution processing at error (S1109) and processing Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 e is a value equal to or greater than “3” of the determination threshold value as a result of comparison by the process of S1157 (S1157: Yes), with the input / output port 205 of main controller 110 In the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, notification is performed on the assumption that there may be an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1154), and the error operation execution process (S1109) Return and end the process.

  It returns to the process of S1155 and continues explanation. If it is determined by the processing of S1155 that the combination of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is normal (S1155: No), the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e is cleared to 0 (S1158) Assuming that a normal command has been received, the processing corresponding to the bit in which “1” is set in the lower byte of the error command is executed (S1159). Thereby, notification of an error and termination of the notification can be performed. Then, the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process.

  As described above, in the second error operation execution process (S1123), the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte of the upper byte “DEh” error command is transmitted to main controller 110 by the process of S1155. In the error determination process (S102) to be executed, it is determined whether or not the combination is an improper combination that can not be set. Then, if it is determined that the combination is incorrect, it is determined that the error command is an abnormal command affected by wiring abnormality or noise, and the occurrence status of the error included in the command is Notification is not performed based on the indicated information (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte).

  On the other hand, when the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte is determined to be normal by the process of S1155 (S1155: No), the error command including the 2 bits is a normal command. On the basis of the information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the command (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte), notification is performed. Therefore, the reliability of error notification can be increased.

  Also, if it is determined that the specific 2 bits of the low-order byte is an incorrect combination three consecutive times by the process of S1155, that is, the same two-bit value is an incorrect error command three consecutive times. The value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 e becomes “3” or more, which is the determination threshold value, only when the signal is received, and there is a high possibility that the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality due to the processing of S1154. You will be informed. In this case, as described above, it is specified that the cause of the error command becoming abnormal is more likely to be the continuous phenomenon wiring abnormality than the noise which is the irregular phenomenon. It is for.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is not even (S1121: Other), the process according to the type of the received error command is executed (S1124). That is, in a mode corresponding to the command, lighting of each lamp, display by the 7-segment display 37b, or audio output from the speaker is performed, and an error generated is notified. The error command at this time corresponds to an error of 1 for a 1-byte command consisting of 2 bytes. After execution of the process of S1124, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variation display process (S1013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1013). This fluctuation display process (S1013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81. In order to make it possible, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, and the generated display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to transmit to the indication control device 114.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1201). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S1201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from main controller 110, this is the case. The variable display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1202), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S1102 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type (variation time) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1105 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S1203).

  Then, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the value of the counter provided in the RAM 223 and the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S1203 (S1204). Here, the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the fluctuation pattern command is defined only for the fluctuation time, but the various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S1204 One of the variation patterns is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S 1204, next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. It sets to transmit to (S1205). Also, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S1203 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1206).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop symbol that matches the stop type, and when displaying the change effect started by the display change pattern command, the display Display the selected stop symbol.

  Then, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball is performed). (S1207) The variation display process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into main processing repeatedly executed after power on, command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1301). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed type character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read out, the read out character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the decompressed character information The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization.

  When the initial setting process is completed, next, interrupt permission is set (S1302), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Then, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1302, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1401), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. And the display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. The V interruption signal is a signal which is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 236 completes the drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image at the stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), first, a command determination process (S1501) is executed. In the command determination process (S1501), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and a process according to the command is executed. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the command determination process (S1501) ends, next, the display setting process (S1502) is executed. In the display setting process (S1502), one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the screen to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1501) etc. Concretely identify the contents of the image.

  After the display setting process (S1502) is executed, task processing is then executed (S1503). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1502), the characters (sprites, displayed objects) constituting the image. While specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thereby, the image controller 236 executes the drawing process of the image according to the information and also causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the image drawn according to the information received 1 V earlier, together with the drive signal Control for transmitting image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  After that, after performing other necessary processing, for example, processing of updating various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1501) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S1601: No), the command determination process is ended. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1601: Yes), the type of the command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S1603).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display initialization command among the unprocessed commands (S1604), and if there is a display initialization command (S1604: Yes), initialization command processing is executed. Then (S1605), the process returns to the process of S1601.

  If it is determined in the process of S1604 that there is no initialization command for display (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among the unprocessed commands (S1606), and display is performed. If there is a confirmation command for use (S1606: Yes), a confirmation command process is executed (S1607), and the process returns to the process of S1601. In the finalization command processing, the third symbol display device 81 is set to display the finalization display effect for causing the finalization of the fluctuation effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1606 that there is no display table determination command (S1606: No), it is then determined whether there is a display demo command (S1608), and if there is a display demo command (S1608: Yes) The demo command process is executed (S1609), and the process returns to the process of S1601. In the demonstration command processing, setting is made to display a demonstration screen on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1608 that there is no display demo command (S1608: No), it is then determined whether there is a display variation pattern command (S1610), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S1610) S1610: Yes) The variation pattern command process is executed (S1611), and the process returns to S1601. In the variation pattern command processing, a specific variation selected by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation mode indicated by the display variation pattern command, that is, the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the main controller 110. According to the embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is set to execute the fluctuation effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1610 that there is no display variation pattern command (S1610: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command (S1612), and if there is a display stop type command (S1612: Yes) A stop type command process is executed (S1613), and the process returns to S1601. In the stop type command processing, in the finalized display of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, setting is performed so that the final display is performed with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command.

  If it is determined in the process of S1612 that there is no display type command for suspension (S1612: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S1622), and the process returns to S1601.

  In the process of S1601 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1601: Yes ), The processing of S1602 to S1622 is executed again. Then, the processes of S1601 to S1622 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S1601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the error command based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c generated by the error determination process (S102) Since information on the occurrence status of a plurality of different types of errors is included, the voice lamp control device 113 can be notified of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors only by transmitting one error command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  Further, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment reflects the occurrence status of different types of errors in each bit of the lower byte at the timing at which an error occurs or disappears based on the detection results by the various switches 208. The generated error command is generated and stored in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203.

  Therefore, the ring for command transmission is compared with the case where the error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of different types of errors is periodically generated and transmitted regardless of the change in the occurrence status of the error. It is possible to reduce the proportion of error commands in the buffer. Therefore, the processing load in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 23) can be further reduced, and the capacity occupied by the error command in the ring buffer for command transmission (not shown) can be compressed more efficiently. can do. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more preferably.

  In addition, in the error determination processing (S102), the determination result is stored in each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and various errors including error occurrence information in the error command of the upper byte "DDh" are the present embodiment. The configuration with high probability that is adopted also in the model whose configuration is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 (ie, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64 This is an error related to the mouth (first specified winning opening) 65a), and is a highly probable error that is required to be notified regardless of the game content and game playability of the model. Therefore, even with different types of pachinko machines, it is possible to create a program etc. by using the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh", and thus notification of the occurrence of multiple types of errors with one error command. Making it easy to create a pachinko machine.

  Main controller 110 performs an error determination process (S102, S711) so that the value (state) of at least two specific bits constituting the lower byte of the error command does not become a predetermined incorrect combination. Generate commands and also. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the value of a specific bit constituting the lower byte of the error command is main control by the first and second error operation execution processing (S1122, S1123). It is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormal combination is not generated by the device 110 (S1131, S1136, S1139, S1155), and if it is a predetermined abnormal combination, notification based on the error command Make a non-execution. As a result, based on an error command that is in an abnormal state due to noise mixing or wiring abnormality, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously reported, and the reliability of the error notification can be improved. .

  The error command may become an abnormal command due to the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 and the mixing of noise into the wiring 302 and the like. However, while it is an irregular phenomenon that mixing of noise into the wiring 302 or the like affects which part (line) of the wiring 302, a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in a part of the wiring 302 is a wiring. Since this phenomenon is continued until it is eliminated by the exchange of 302 or the like, the bit corresponding to the line (a part of the interconnection 302) where a short circuit or the like has occurred until the wiring abnormality is eliminated is Continues to be incorrect.

  Therefore, as described above, the audio lamp control device 113 is an error command including two bits in the lower byte of the error command which is an incorrect combination value, and the two incorrect bits are the same. When the signal is received three times in a row, the process of S1135 notifies that there is a possibility that a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit or a disconnection may occur in a part of the wiring 302. Therefore, the notification to that effect can be performed only when there is a high possibility that the wiring abnormality has occurred. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Further, when the power is turned on, the main control apparatus 110 executes an error determination process (S711) and transmits it by an error command of the upper byte "DEh". The error command “DEh” is generated by the main control unit 110 as a command in which no error is assigned to the third bit to the seventh bit and the value of each bit is set to “0”. It is.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, since the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on, any value of the third bit to the seventh bit becomes "1" when receiving at the time of power on. Determine if it is. At this time, when it is determined that one of the values is “1”, an abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wire 302 between the main control unit 110 and the audio lamp control unit 113. There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in a part of the wiring 302. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where an abnormality occurs in the wiring 302 and the command can not be transmitted / received accurately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the occurrence of various errors is input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 by the error determination process (S102) periodically executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Based on the signal, each judgment is made periodically, and only if it is judged that the occurrence status of the error has changed (that is, an error has occurred or has been eliminated) by the periodic judgment. An error command, which is composed of bytes and in which information indicating the error occurrence status is set one by one in each bit of the lower byte, is generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the main processing.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is wired when an error command in which the value of a specific two bits in the lower byte is an incorrect combination is received a predetermined number of times consecutively It is determined that there is a possibility that the wiring abnormality at 302 has occurred, and that effect is notified.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, based on the signals input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 by the error determination process (S102) periodically executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When an error occurrence is determined, an error command is formed of 2 bytes and information indicating the error occurrence status is set in each bit of the lower byte one by one, and the error determination process ( It is generated each time S102) and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the main processing.

  At this time, while an error occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 repeatedly generates and transmits an error command in which information indicating the error is set.

  Also in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, processing for determining the occurrence of wiring abnormality is performed as in the first embodiment, but the difference is as follows. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment receives an error command in which the value of a specific two bits in the lower byte is an incorrect combination, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the type of the two incorrect bits. No, it counts the number of times an error command including 2 incorrect bits is received, and the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality if the count value becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value (decision threshold) within a predetermined time (monitoring time). It is determined that there is a possibility that a problem has occurred, and that effect is notified.

  For this reason, in the second embodiment, even if no error occurs and there is no change in the occurrence status of the error, the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command and does wiring abnormality occur? Since the determination is made, the notification can be made promptly after the occurrence of the wiring abnormality as compared with the first embodiment in which transmission and reception of the error command is performed only when there is a change in the occurrence condition of the error. The reliability can be further enhanced.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a bit check execution flag 203d which is included in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment; The bit check execution flag 223f which has been stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has become unnecessary, and the first to fourth wires which have been stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. In addition to providing the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b of 1 in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and timer allocation Error determination processing (S102), which is one of the loading processing (see FIG. 17) Among the main processes (see FIG. 29) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the partial process included in each of the error operation execution process (S1109) which is one process of the command determination process (S1014) This differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The other processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the point that the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration is that the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with one wiring abnormality determination counter 323b. That is the point. In the following, such differences are mainly described. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has one wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b. The wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a counter for storing the number of abnormal error commands received by the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b during a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms). If the value becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, “10”), the abnormal error command for the predetermined value is not due to the mixing of noise, and the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 (for example, , And is used to notify that there is a possibility that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred.

  The wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial value setting process (S 910, see FIG. 28) in the start-up process performed when the power of the audio lamp control device 113 is turned on. If it is determined that the error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" received by the control device 113 contains two incorrect bits in the lower byte, one is added. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45. However, in the present embodiment, the occurrence status of an error (error occurrence or elimination at each timing whether or not there is a change in the occurrence status of the error The main control unit 110 sequentially transmits information indicating that the main control unit 110 is in an active state. Therefore, if the lower byte of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 contains an incorrect bit due to a single cause such as noise mixing in the wiring 302 etc., the error command is a single one. Because of this, the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is added singly. On the other hand, if the low byte of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 contains an incorrect bit due to the continuous cause of the wiring abnormality (short circuit, disconnection, etc.) of the wire 302, the voice lamp control device 113. Since the low order byte repeatedly receives an error command including an abnormal 2 bits, the value of the line abnormality determination counter 323b is repeatedly added while the line abnormality continues.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 counts the time by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) when the wiring abnormality determination counter 223 b adds 1 to the state of the initial value (for example, “0”). To start. Then, when the value of the counter 223b is equal to the determination threshold (for example, 10) until a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) elapses after 1 is first added to the value of the counter 223b, the MPU 221 The error command received so far is due to a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302, etc. (It is highly likely that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is the cause, and it is unlikely that the noise is the cause) It is determined that

  Then, the occurrence of the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is notified in a mode different from various errors. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45.

  First, with reference to FIG. 39, an error determination process (S102) included in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MP 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this error determination process (S102).

  The error determination process (S102) is a process executed in each process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the start-up process (see FIG. 22) as described above in the first embodiment. Based on the state of the various switches 208, the occurrence status of various errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 are respectively determined, and an error command is generated based on the determination result, and the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203 is provided. Set the generated error command to.

  The error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the MPU 201 performs first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c in the processes of S501 to S507. It is the timing to set up the bit. As described above, the MPU 201 according to the first embodiment generates or cancels one of the bits of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c at the timing when the error occurrence state changes. “1” is set according to the error (see FIGS. 11 to 16), and “0” is set at other timings.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, while the MPU 201 generates an error, the MPU 201 generates each bit of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c according to the generated error. Set repeatedly.

  Further, in the error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is the error determination process of the first embodiment in the error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment. It is a point that each processing of S509, S510, S512, and S515 included in (S102) is not executed. As described above, in the first embodiment, each value of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c indicates that the occurrence status of an error has changed (that is, one of "1" Is a stored value), and only when the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, an error command including a plurality of pieces of information indicating an error occurrence status is generated.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the error determination process (S102) performed every 2 ms, and the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are processed. From each value, an upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" error command is generated. Then, as in the first embodiment, this command is sequentially notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S801) performed in the main processing.

  Therefore, as in the first embodiment, an error command is generated at the time of power on and the bit check (see FIG. 33) by the voice lamp control device 113 is not performed in the second embodiment. By the error command continuously transmitted by the control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can immediately monitor the occurrence of wiring abnormality after the power is turned on.

  In the error determination process (S102), first, the radio wave detection process is executed to determine whether a "radio wave detection error" has occurred (S501, see FIG. 25A).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the correspondence between the signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201 and the value of the zeroth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201. FIG. 40 (b) is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows a temporal change of the value of the 0th bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the radio wave detection device 208a does not detect the radio wave irradiated to the pachinko machine 10, and the off signal is sent to the MPU 201. When outputting, the MPU 201 sets "1" indicating that the "radio wave detection error" has occurred to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time an error determination process is performed every 2 m. (S520: Yes, S521).

  On the other hand, when the radio wave detection device 208a does not detect the radio wave irradiated to the pachinko machine 10 and outputs the OFF signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 sets the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. “0” indicating that “radio wave detection error” has not occurred is maintained (S520: No).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, a winning switch abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not a "winning switch error" has occurred (S502, see FIG. 25 (b)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the correspondence between the signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201 and the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, and FIG. 43 (b) is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows temporal change of the value of the 2nd bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when an off signal is input from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, or a ball is detected by the starting win switch 208b. If the output period of the ON signal that is output during the period is less than 0.2 s, the MPU 201 does not generate a "winning switch abnormal error" in the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Is set to “0”, which indicates (S530: No).

  On the other hand, if the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b is still output even after 0.2 s from the output start, the MPU 201 is performed every 2 ms for an excess period from 0.2 s after the output start. Every time the error determination process is performed, “1” is set to indicate that the “winning switch abnormal error” has occurred in the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (S530: Yes, S531).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, front frame opening determination processing is executed to determine whether a “front frame opening error” has occurred (S 503, see FIG. 25C).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the correspondence between the signal output from the front frame open switch 208e to the MPU 201 and the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 41A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 41B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. 41C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the third bit of the buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 41C is the fourth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, the front frame open switch 208e sends an OFF signal to the MPU 201 while the front frame 14 is closed. Output. When the off signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 closes the front frame 14 to the value of the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that there is a certain problem, that is, the "front frame opening detection error" has been eliminated. At this time, the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" indicating that the front frame is not in the open state (ie, in the closed state) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the MPU 201 sets “0” to the third bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b and “1” to the fourth bit every time the error determination processing is performed every 2 ms. Set

  On the other hand, while the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame open switch 208 e outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201. When this on signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 makes the front frame 14 open at the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that a certain thing, that is, "front frame opening detection error" has occurred. At this time, the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" indicating that the front frame is not closed (that is, it is open) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the front frame 14 is in the open state, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the third bit and “0” to the fourth bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b each time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the front frame opening prize determination process is executed to determine whether a "front frame opening prize error" has occurred (S504, see FIG. 26A).

  Here, referring to FIG. 42, the correspondence between the signal output from each of the front frame open switch 208 e and the start winning switch 208 b to the MPU 201 and the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b explain.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, and FIG. 42 (b) is a temporal change of signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU FIG. 42C is a timing chart showing temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory set in the MPU by the error judgment processing.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the front frame 14 is in the closed state, and the off signal from the front frame opening switch 208e is input to the MPU 201. In the case where the front frame 14 is open and there is no input signal from the start winning switch 208b even if the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208e is input, the MPU 201 performs a line every 2 ms. Every time the error determination process is performed, “0” is set in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b to indicate that “presence error at the time of opening the front frame” has not occurred (S550: No, 551 : No).

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is open, the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is input, and the ON signal output while the ball is detected by the start winning switch 208 b is input to the MPU 201. During this period, the MPU 201 indicates that “the front frame opening winning error” has occurred in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. “1” is set (S550: Yes, S551: Yes, S552).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the inner frame open determination process is executed to determine whether an “inner frame open error” has occurred (S505, see FIG. 26 (b)).

  Now, with reference to FIG. 44, the correspondence between the signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208f to the MPU 201 and the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal change in signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208f to the MPU 201, and FIG. 44 (a) is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. 44C is a timing chart showing temporal change of the value of the fifth bit of the buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 44C is the sixth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, while the inner frame 14 is in the closed state, the inner frame open switch 208f sends an OFF signal to the MPU 201. Output. When the off signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 closes the inner frame 12 to the value of the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. A "1" is shown to indicate that the "internal frame open detection error" has been eliminated. At this time, the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at “0”, which indicates that the inner frame is not in the open state (that is, in the closed state) (S540: No, S542). . Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the MPU 201 performs “0” in the fifth bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b and “1” in the sixth bit every time the error determination processing is performed every 2 ms. Set

  On the other hand, while the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the inner frame open switch 208 f outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201. When the on signal is input to the MPU 201, the inner frame 12 is opened to the value of the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that there is a certain thing, that is, an "inner frame open detection error" has occurred. At this time, the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at “0”, which indicates that the inner frame is not in the closed state (that is, in the open state) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the open state, the MPU 201 sets “1” to “5” and “0” to “6” of the error determination buffer memory 203 b each time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the processing of the illegal prize determination process is executed to determine whether or not the "incorrect prize opening error" has occurred (S506, see FIG. 27A).

  Here, referring to FIG. 45, the opening timing of the first large opening 65a (that is, the timing when the opening and closing plate of the first large opening 65a is driven by the first large opening solenoid) and the first large opening Correspondence between the signal output from the first specific winning switch 208c for detecting the ball passing through 65a to the MPU 201 and the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 based on the signal output Explain the relationship.

  FIG. 45 (a) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening 65a and the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, and FIG. 45 (b) is a first specific winning switch 208c. 45C is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the MPU 201 to the MPU 201, and FIG. 45C shows the time of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows a typical change.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, after the occurrence of the big hit, the opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a is performed for a predetermined period, and the effective passage period of the ball in the large opening 65a including the period is set. As described above, this period is a period in which sufficient time is taken for the first large opening 65a to completely close after the MPU 201 instructs the closing of the first opening 65a, and the first It is a period during which the ball that has passed through the opening 65a is handled as a ball that has passed by a normal game.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c), when the ON signal from the first specified winning switch 208c is input during a period other than the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, the MPU 201 In the error judgment processing, the value of the seventh bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b is set to "1". When the first specific winning switch 208c detects passage of the ball in the first large opening 65a and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 is used for the first error determination every time the error determination is performed every 2 ms. In the seventh bit of the buffer memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the ball effective passage period in the first large opening 65a, the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0" regardless of the state of the output signal from the first specific winning switch 208c. Is maintained.

  Also, since the 0th bit of the second specified winning opening 650a and the second error determination buffer memory 203c is also similar to the 7th bit of the first specified winning opening 65a and the first error determination buffer memory 203b, And I omit the explanation.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes vibration detection processing (S507). The vibration detection process (S507) is the same process as that of the first embodiment described above. Next, it is determined whether or not other various errors have occurred (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  After shifting to the processing of S511, “DDh” is set as the value of the upper byte, and the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b in which the value of each bit is set by each processing of S501 to S506 is set as the value of the lower byte. An error command is generated and set in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S511), and “DEh” is set as the value of the upper byte, and the value of each bit is set by each processing of S506 and S507. An error command having the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c as the value of the lower byte is generated and set in the command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S513). As a result, one error command in which information indicating the occurrence status of errors for a plurality of types is stored is put in a state where it can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S801) of the main process.

  Next, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (initialized), and the error determination process (S102 and S711) is ended.

  As described above, in the error determination process (S102, S711), the occurrence of various errors is periodically determined based on the signals input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201, and the errors are reflected in the determination results. A command was generated for each of the periodic determinations. Then, the generated command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 202 and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when an error command is transmitted in this manner, one error command is periodically set for each error determined for each type in the command transmission ring buffer of main controller 110. Because of this, an error command has squeezed the capacity of the ring buffer for command transmission.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since information indicating the occurrence of an error is set one by one in each bit of the lower byte of the error command composed of 2 bytes, the ring for command transmission It is possible to suppress the number of error commands set periodically for the buffer. Therefore, even in the case of a model that periodically generates an error command, it is possible to preferably transmit the command.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, while an error is occurring, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits an error command indicating that the error is occurring to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to surely know the occurrence of the error by notification.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 46 and 47, when the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment receives an error command transmitted from the main control device 110, one of the command determination processing S1014 An error operation execution process (S1109) to be executed as the process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error operation execution process (S1109). The error operation execution process (S1109) is a process corresponding to the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, as described above in the first embodiment.

  First, the difference between the error operation execution process (S1109) of the second embodiment and the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the error-time operation execution process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, the specific two of the low-order bytes of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured by the processes of S1126 to S1129. Each process determines whether or not the combination of bits is an incorrect combination that can not be a normal command generated by the master controller 110, and a combination of two specific bits in any process is incorrect. When it is determined that the error command is an incorrect error command, notification is not performed based on the information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the error command.

  Further, when an error command in which a specific 2-bit value is abnormal is continuously received a predetermined number of times, the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is notified.

  Also in the error operation execution process (S1109) of the second embodiment, processing for determining the occurrence of wiring abnormality is performed as in the error operation execution process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment. It differs in the point. That is, in the error determination process (FIG. 46) of the second embodiment, when a specific combination of 2-bit values receives an incorrect error command, the error is not detected regardless of the abnormal 2-bit type. If the number of times an error command containing 2 bits is received is counted using wiring abnormality determination counter 223b, and the count value becomes a fixed value (determination threshold) within a predetermined time (monitoring time), The cause of the normal error command is that there is a high possibility of the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113 Do.

  In the following, such differences are mainly described. The same step numbers as those in the first embodiment are the same as the error operation execution process (S1109) in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the error operation execution process (S1109), first, it is determined whether the value of the upper byte of the received error command is "DDh", "DEh", or any other value ( S1121).

  If it is determined that the upper byte of the received error command is "DDh" (S1121: "DDh"), the process proceeds to S2001, and the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the lower byte It is determined whether the value of the fourth bit of is an incorrect combination (S2001).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is the value of the third bit and the fourth bit. . Both are a combination of “1” s, or both are a combination of “0” s. The failure of these combinations means that one of the bits indicates that the front frame 14 is open (not closed), and the other bit indicates that the front frame 14 is closed (not open). This is because it is a contradiction that indicates that the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processes S102 and S711 executed by the main control unit 110. If it is determined in the process of S2001 that the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are any of the incorrect combinations (S2001: Yes), wiring The process proceeds to abnormality determination processing (S2008).

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, in the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008), to the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113. It is determined whether or not a disconnection or short has occurred, and processing according to the determination result is executed. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 18).

  If the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte of the error command are determined to be correct combinations by the process of S2001 (S2001: No), then the error command It is determined whether or not the value of the first bit of the lower byte and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2002).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the values of the first bit and the third bit of the lower byte is “1”, the third bit is the third bit. The bit is a combination of "0". This combination is not normal because the value of the first bit is "1", and the "front frame opening winning error" that occurs when the front frame 14 is open has occurred. It is contradictory that indicates that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (is in the closed state) despite being shown, and is generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. This is because it is an impossible combination of normal commands. If it is determined by the process of S1127 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2002: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S2002 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2002: No), an error is generated next. It is determined whether the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2003).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is the value of the first bit and the fourth bit. Both are combinations of "1". This combination is not normal because the value of the first bit is "1", and the "front frame opening winning error" that occurs when the front frame 14 is open has occurred. It is contradictory that indicates that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (is in the closed state) despite being shown, and is generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. This is because it is an impossible combination of normal commands. If it is determined by the process of S2003 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2003: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2003 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2003: No), then S2004 Then, it is determined whether the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are an improper combination (S2004).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the incorrect combination of the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte in the error command of the upper byte “DDh” is the value of the fifth bit and the sixth bit. . Both are a combination of “1” s, or both are a combination of “0” s. The failure of these combinations means that one bit indicates that the inner frame 12 is open (not closed), and the other bit indicates that the inner frame 12 is closed (not open). This is because it is a contradiction which indicates that the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. If it is determined in the process of S1129 that the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are any of the incorrect combinations (S2004: Yes), wiring The process proceeds to abnormality determination processing (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are a normal combination by the process of S2004 (S2005: No), the upper byte Processing is performed according to the status of occurrence of various errors specified by “DDh” and the value of each bit of the lower byte (S2005). That is, lighting of each lamp, display by the 7-segment display 37b, or voice output from the speaker is performed in a mode corresponding to the value of each bit constituting the lower byte, and the generated error is notified. Thereafter, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  It returns to the process of S1121 and continues description. If it is determined by the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DEh" (S1121: "DEh"), the process proceeds to the process of S2006 and the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of the second bit of the lower byte is an incorrect combination (S2006). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh", the incorrect combination of the values of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is that both the values of the first bit and the second bit are "1". A combination of This combination is not normal if the first bit of the lower byte indicates that the vibration of the set value level is detected by the vibration sensor 208g, and the second bit of the lower byte is detected by the vibration sensor 208g It is contradictory that the vibration level is less than the set value level, and the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by main controller 110. is there. If it is determined in the process of S113 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the second bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2006: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2006 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the second bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2006: No), the upper byte “ Processing corresponding to the occurrence status of various errors specified by the value of each bit of “DEh” and the lower byte is performed (S2005), and the process returns to the command determination processing (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Returning to the process of S1121 again, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is neither "DDh" nor "DEh" (S1121: Other), the process according to the type of the received error command is executed (S1131) , And then return to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008). The wiring abnormality determination process (S2008) is performed in the error operation execution process (S1109, see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the error operation execution process When it is determined that the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an abnormal command by any of the processes of S2001 to S2004 and the process of S2006 of (S1109) (S2001 to S2004 And when the process proceeds to “Yes” in any of the processes in S2006), the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113 are connected. It is determined whether or not a wiring abnormality has occurred, and processing according to the determination result is executed.

  In the wiring abnormality determination processing (2008), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is "0", that is, whether or not it is initialized (S2101), and is initialized (S2101: Yes) The timing by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) is started (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103.

  If it is determined by the process of S2101 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is not "0", the process of S2102 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2103. In this case, in the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b, the number of times of reception of an abnormal error command from the start of time counting is reflected in the wiring abnormality determination processing (S1129) so far.

  In the process of S2103, the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is incremented by 1 to update the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 has received an abnormal error command (S2103).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a value larger than the determination threshold set in advance (S2104). If the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal error command the number of times greater than this value within the monitoring period to be described later, each abnormal error command is a single-shot such as noise. This value is large enough to recognize that it is not due to a specific cause but due to a continuous cause such as wiring abnormality. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, "10" is set as the determination threshold value.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is larger than the determination threshold (S2104: No), it is determined that the wiring abnormality has occurred. Informing of occurrence of wiring abnormality by lighting of each lamp, display by 7-segment display device 37b or sound output from a speaker performed in a mode according to wiring abnormality (S2105), error Return to the time operation execution process.

  When it is determined by the process of S2104 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a value equal to or less than the determination threshold (S2104: No), the time period measured by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) is the wiring It is determined whether or not a monitoring period set in advance as a period for determining an abnormality has been exceeded (S2106). The monitoring period in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to 50 ms from the start of clocking.

  If it is determined by the process of S2104 that the clocking period by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) does not exceed the monitoring period (S2104: No), this process is ended and an error operation execution process is performed. Return.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S2106 that the clocking period by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) exceeds the monitoring period (S2104: Yes), the clocking is ended and the wiring abnormality determination counter The value of 323b is cleared to 0, this processing is ended, and the process returns to the operation execution processing at error (S2107, S2108).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment of the present invention, the upper byte "DDh" and the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control device 110 executing the error determination process (S102) The low-order byte contains information indicating the occurrence of multiple errors of different types in the low-order byte, so sending the one error command only causes the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate the occurrence of multiple errors. It can be notified. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  In addition, various errors whose judgment results are stored in each bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b by the error judgment processing (S102) are also adopted in a pachinko machine having a different model from that of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In an error related to the highly probable configuration (that is, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a) It is a highly probable error that notification is required also for pachinko machines of different types. Therefore, even with different types of pachinko machines, it is possible to create a program etc. by using the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh", and thus notification of the occurrence of multiple types of errors with one error command. Making it easy to create a pachinko machine.

  Main controller 110 determines the value (state) of at least two specific bits constituting the lower byte of the error command of upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" by the error determination process (S102, S711). An error command is generated so as not to be an incorrect combination of the above and is sequentially transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the main processing. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the value of a specific bit constituting the lower byte of the error command is not generated by the main control device 110 by the operation upon execution of an error (S1109). It is determined whether or not the combination is incorrect (in the processes of S2001 to S2004 or S2006), and in the case of the incorrect combination (in any of the processes of S2001 to S2004 and S2006), the process proceeds to No branch. (In the case of (1)), the notification based on the information of the lower byte of the error command is not executed. As a result, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously notified, and the reliability of the error notification can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of receptions of the error command determined that the lower byte 2 bits are in an improper combination by the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b for a predetermined period (monitoring period), and Based on the count value, it is determined whether or not the error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh” of the combination in which the lower byte 2 bit is improper is continuously received by the voice lamp control unit 113. When it is determined that each command is continuously received, it is highly probable that the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality such as a disconnection or a short circuit, the lighting of the lamp, and the 7-segment display 37b. And a voice output from a speaker to notify that effect. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh” transmitted from the main control device 110 has changed the occurrence status of any error corresponding to the error command. First, it is transmitted only at the timing (the timing at which it occurred or resolved), and even if the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality, if the occurrence status of the error does not change at least twice or more (first In the embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 can not determine whether the abnormal lamp command is caused by noise which is a single phenomenon or due to a wiring abnormality which is a continuous phenomenon. Can not execute notification for

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" is sequentially sent from the main control unit 110 regardless of the occurrence status of the error. In the case where a problem occurs, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the wiring abnormality based on those commands, and can promptly notify the wiring abnormality. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the notification to that effect can be performed more preferably.

  In the above embodiment, various commands are 8-bit parallel data, and 8-bit (8-bit) connected between the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 215 of the audio lamp control unit 113. The main controller 110 transmits a command to the audio lamp control device 113 through the parallel wiring 302) in one direction from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the command is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 performs external output processing (S801) to transmit from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, various commands are transmitted as serial data via one serial wire connected between the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 215 of the audio lamp control unit 113. It is also good. In this case, as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, one provided with the following data transmission / reception circuit can be adopted. That is, it has a predetermined buffer, and has a data transmission / reception circuit that transmits a command set in the buffer by the MPU 201 to the reception command buffer of the audio lamp control device 113 independently of the processing of the MPU 201. can do.

  When the MPU 201 is provided with such a data transmission / reception circuit to transmit an error command to the audio lamp control device 113, the main control unit 110 of the MPU 201 does not need to transmit a command by external output processing (S801). In each of the processes of S509 and S510, an error command can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 only by setting an error command in the buffer of the data transmission / reception circuit instead of storing in the ring buffer for command transmission. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be further reduced.

  At this time, it is necessary to always set the seventh bit to a fixed value of "0" or "1" to indicate the delimitation of one command, in the lower byte of each command. Therefore, in the case where the MPU 201 is provided with the above-described data transmission / reception circuit, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c need not to store error occurrence information in their seventh bits. is there.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes an error determination process (S102) each time the timer interrupt process is executed in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 ms, and various errors Although the case of performing the determination of has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the error determination process may be performed in the main process. Also, when the error determination process is performed as one process of the timer interrupt process or the main process, it is not performed every time the timer interrupt process or the main process is executed, but each time the process is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) Processing may be performed once.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the error operation execution process (1109) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, an error in which one type of information indicating the occurrence status of each type error is set in each bit of the lower byte Although it has been described that the determination as to whether or not the command is an incorrect command is made on the basis of whether or not the value of the incorrect combination is set in the specific 2 bits of the lower byte, It is not limited to this. For example, whether or not an error command is abnormal may be determined by a combination of values of 3 bits or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the error operation execution process (1109) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether the error command of the upper byte "DEh" is an abnormal command or not. Although the case where the determination is made based on the values of the first bit and the second bit in the lower byte of the command has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and based on the values of the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte. It may be determined whether or not the command is abnormal. In the above respective embodiments, the error command of the upper byte “DEh” is a command of the fixed value of “0” in all of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte. If the MPU 221 determines that "1" is stored in any of these bits, it means that the command including the bit is affected by noise or wiring abnormality. Therefore, in the first embodiment, whether “1” is stored in any of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte in the second error operation execution process (see FIG. 33), It is configured to make a determination together with the determination processing of S1155, and when any one of those bits is “1”, the error notification based on the error command including the bit is not executed. Furthermore, each time an error command of the upper byte "DEh" in which "1" is stored in the same bit among the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte is counted, the count value becomes a predetermined value ( For example, in the case of 3), it is determined that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred, and that effect is notified. According to this, since it is possible to determine whether or not the error command is an abnormal one based on the value of one bit, it is possible to more effectively suppress an erroneous error notification. In the second embodiment, whether or not “1” is stored in any of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte in the error operation execution process (see FIG. 46), as in S2006. If any one of those bits is “1”, the process proceeds to the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008), and the error notification based on the error command including the bit is not made. Make it run. Furthermore, the error command of the upper byte “DEh” in which “1” is stored in the same bit among the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte is counted using the wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b like other commands. If the count value reaches a determination threshold value (for example, 10) within a predetermined time, it is determined that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred, and notification of that is performed. Also in this case, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In each of the above embodiments, the upper byte of the error command including information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors has been described using two types of “DDh” and “DEh”. If it is a value that is not limited and can identify an error command and the type of information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the error command, the value does not overlap with the upper byte of another command. Values other than DDh "and" DEh "can be used.

  The error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "command" described in the claims, and the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" described in the above embodiment. The value of each bit included in the low-order byte in corresponds to “determination result information” described in the claims, and the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203 described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. Corresponds to the "command storage means" of

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for controlling the game based on commands transmitted from the main control means via the signal line, and notification based on instructions from the slave control means A gaming machine comprising notification means for performing, the detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means; Command generation means for generating a command; command storage means capable of storing a plurality of the commands; command storage and execution means for storing the command in the command storage means when the command is generated by the command generation means; Transmission means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means; and plural types of malfunctions in the gaming machine And a determination unit that determines whether any one of the states is determined based on the detection result of the detection unit, and the command generation unit determines the determination result of the determination unit. It is result information, and generates a command including a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine in one command, When the slave control means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the game machine is in one of the abnormal states based on the determination result information included in the command. A slave-side determining unit that determines whether or not the game machine is unauthorized based on the determination result information included in the command received by the slave control unit. If it is determined by said detail side determination unit has a state, the gaming machine A1, characterized in that is an indication of the notification in accordance with the state to the informing means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the detecting means detects the state of the gaming machine, the command generating means of the main control means generates a command based on the detected state of the gaming machine, and the command storage executing means , The command is stored in a plurality of storable command storage units. Here, the main control means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has become based on the detection result of the detection means. The command generation means is the judgment result information indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and the plural judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among plural kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine is Generate a command to be included in the command. Therefore, when an unsent command stored in the command storage unit is transmitted to the slave control unit, the slave control unit having received the command is based on the determination result information included in the command. The slave-side determining means determines that the gaming machine is in any abnormal state. If it is determined by the subordinate determination means that the gaming machine is in any of the abnormal states, the notification means is instructed to notify in accordance with the state. Therefore, the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including, in one command, a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine. By transmitting to the control means, notification can be executed according to a plurality of determination result information included in the command, so that a command including one determination result information is generated for each type of unauthorized state of the gaming machine. The number of commands generated by the main control means can be reduced compared to the case of generation. As a result, the capacity of the command storage unit can be efficiently used, so that there is an effect that transmission of a command from the main control unit to the sub control unit can be suitably performed.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the command generation unit generates a command including first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine, the command generation means is not compatible with the first state in the command. The command is generated without including the second determination result information corresponding to the two states, and the slave determination unit receives the command transmitted by the transmission unit when the slave control unit receives the command. A second slave-side determining unit that determines whether the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included in the received command, and the second slave-side determining unit When it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included, the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed. Gaming machine A2 wherein there.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including the first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine in one command, the command is incompatible with the first state. The second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine is not included. In spite of that, it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the command received by the secondary control means by the second secondary side determination means of the secondary control means. In this case, the command received by the slave control unit is affected by noise mixing in the wiring interposed between the master control unit and the slave control unit or a break or short circuit in the wiring. May be In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A2, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, A game machine A3 that instructs the notification means to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined by the subordinate side determination means that the game machine is in an abnormal state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a command including the first determination result information and the second determination result information is continuously received by the secondary control means, each command is not due to a single noise effect, and the main control There is a high possibility that the phenomenon may be due to a continuous phenomenon such as a short circuit or an open circuit of a wire which intervenes the means and the secondary control means. On the other hand, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, the slave side determination means The notification means is instructed to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. By this notification, it is possible to notify the attendants of the game arcade that there may have been a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring, so the game is played by the gaming machine in a state in which the short circuit or disconnection of the wiring has occurred. Has the effect of being able to prevent

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the command generation means generates a command including, in one command, fixed value information unrelated to the state of the game machine together with the plurality of determination result information. When the slave side determination means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the slave side determination means determines whether or not the fixed value information is included in the received command. A third slave determination means is provided, and when the third slave determination means determines that the fixed value information is included in the received command, notification based on the determination result information included in the received command A game machine A4 characterized by non-executing an instruction of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the command generation means of the main control means generates a command including one set of fixed value information unrelated to the state of the gaming machine together with a plurality of determination result information. If it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included in the command received by the secondary control means by the third secondary-side determination means of the secondary control means, the secondary control The command received by the means may be influenced by noise mixed in a signal line interposed between the main control means and the secondary control means. In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the determination means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is in a predetermined time interval. The command generation unit is the determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination unit each time the determination unit performs the determination for each predetermined time, and the plurality of types of defects in the gaming machine are determined. A game machine B1 that generates a command including a plurality of pieces of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the normal states in one command.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination means of the main control means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is set, at predetermined time intervals. The command is a command that includes a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine each time by the command generation unit. Generate Therefore, the slave control means can perform the determination by the second slave side determination means one by one by transmitting such a command by the transmission means, so that an abnormal state such as a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring can be found promptly. To that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably prevent the game from being performed by the gaming machine in a state in which a short circuit or a disconnection or the like of the wiring occurs.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the main control means is a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine, and one command including a plurality of the determination result information generated by the command generating means. If it is determined by the determination means that the corresponding abnormal state is not in any state, the command storage non-storage of the one command generated by the command generation means is not performed in the command storage means. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the play machine A1 to A4, the following effect is exerted. That is, it is determined that one command including a plurality of the determination result information generated by the command generation unit is not in any of the abnormal states of the gaming machine corresponding to the one command. When it is determined by the command storage non-execution means, the first command is not stored in the command storage means, so that the free space of the command storage means can be increased. As a result, since the command storage means can be used more efficiently, there is an effect that the transmission of the command from the main control means to the sub control means can be performed more preferably.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 and C1, the command generation means includes only the determination result information corresponding to an abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model. A game machine D1 characterized by generating a first command including the plurality of determination result information.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by A1 to A4, B1 and C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the command generation means generates the first command including the plurality of pieces of determination result information consisting only of the determination result information corresponding to the abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game nature for each model. The code of the first command can be used repeatedly between different models to create command generation means for different models. For this reason, it is possible to facilitate creation of a notifying gaming machine having a command generation unit that generates a command including a plurality of determination result information.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the command generation unit generates a command including the plurality of determination result information in addition to the first command, the command may not be generated depending on the game content or the game characteristics of the gaming machine. A game machine D2 characterized by including only the determination result information corresponding to a normal state.

  That is, the command generation means generates the judgment result information corresponding to the abnormal state that may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model, and the abnormal state generated according to the game content or the game property of the gaming machine. Since a command mixed with determination result information corresponding to a state is not generated, a command including determination result information corresponding to an abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model Can be used among different models to more easily create command generation means for different models.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1 and D2, whether or not the judging means is in any of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine when the power is turned on Is determined based on various states of the gaming machine detected by the detection means, and the command generation means is determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination means, Generating a third command including, in one command, a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the type of abnormal states and fixed value information unrelated to the determination result information And the slave-side determining unit includes the fixed value information in the third command when the third command transmitted by the transmitting unit is received when the power is turned on. The second slave determination means for determining whether the third command is included or not, and the second slave determination means determines that the third command does not include the fixed value information. A game machine E1 for instructing the notification means to notify.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the play gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1 and D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the main control means is the determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination means by the command generation means, and a plurality of determination result information corresponding to two or more of the plural types of abnormal states in the gaming machine And a fixed value information unrelated to the determination result information in one command, and a third command is generated and generated, and this is transmitted to the slave control means by the transmission means. When the slave control means receives this third command, it is judged by the fourth slave side judgment means of the slave side judgment means whether fixed value information is included in the third command or not. Then, when it is determined by the fourth slave-side determining unit that the fixed-value information is not included in the determination result information included in the command, the notifying unit instructs the notifying unit to notify. Here, if there is no abnormality in the wiring corresponding to the fixed value information, while the secondary control means can determine that the fixed value information is included by the fourth slave side determining means, the fixed value information is included. If not, it means that an abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit has occurred in the wiring corresponding to the fixed value information. Therefore, before the game is started, it is possible to detect that an abnormality has occurred in the wiring or the detection means, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the state in which the abnormality has occurred in the wiring. It has the effect of

  A gaming machine E1 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2, E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine E2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2, and E1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (large opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2 and E1, a gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
29 to 33 Electric decoration 37b 7-segment display (part of notification means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 main controller 110 (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device 113 (follow control means)
208 Various switches (part of detection means)
226 Voice output device (part of notification means)
S102, S711 Command determination processing S501 to S508 Determination unit, command generation unit S511, S513 Command storage execution unit S510, S512 Command storage non-execution unit S801 External output processing (transmission unit)
S1109 Error operation execution processing (following side judgment means)
S1131, S1136, S1139, S1155 Second slave side determination means S2001 to S2004, S2006 second slave side determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

  A gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine mainly comprises detecting means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, main control means for controlling the game, and various commands transmitted from the main control means And a variety of devices such as a display device, a lamp, and an audio output device connected to the slave control means. When the main control means determines that the state of the gaming machine is in the predetermined state based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine by the detection means, the main control means notifies the slave control means in order to notify that the state is reached. Send a command The slave control means makes a notification using various devices according to the command.

JP, 2011-155158, A

However, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can more suitably control gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a main control unit for performing main control of the game, and slave control means for controlling a game based on the commands that are sent et whether the main control unit A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying based on an instruction from the secondary control means, the detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means comprising the detection means Based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the command generation means for generating a command, a command storage means capable of storing a plurality of the commands, and a command when the command is generated by the command generation means Command storage / execution means stored in the command storage means; and transmission means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means. Determining means for determining whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has become based on the detection result of the detection means, the command generation means the a determination result information indicating a determination result of the determining means, a plurality of said decision result information corresponding to predetermined two or more non-normal state among a plurality of types of an abnormal condition in the gaming machine, 1 is intended to generate the possible commands be included in the command, the slave control means, when receiving a command including the determination result information transmitted by said transmitting means, included in the received command based on the determination result information, before being transmitted to the first detail side determination unit configured to determine whether the gaming machine is in one of the non-normal state, by the transmitting means When a command including determination result information is received, the received command may not be compatible with the first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine and the first state if it is normal. A second slave- side determination unit that determines whether or not the second determination result information corresponding to the state is included together, and the determination result information included in the command received by the slave control unit based on, when the gaming machine is determined by either of the first detail side determination means has a non-normal condition state, and are not to instruct a notification in accordance with the state to the notification means And an instruction for notification based on the determination result information included in the command when it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included by the second slave-side determining unit. In the non-execution of There is .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the main control means for performing main control of the game, the slave control means for controlling the game based on the command transmitted from the master control means, and the slave control means for controlling the game. A gaming machine comprising: notification means for notifying based on an instruction; and detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means comprising: the game machine detected by the detection means Command generation means for generating a command, command storage means capable of storing a plurality of the commands, and when the command is generated by the command generation means, the command is stored in the command storage means Command storage execution means; transmission means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means; Determining means for determining whether or not any one of several types of abnormal states is reached based on the detection result of the detection means, the command generation means comprising The determination result information indicating the determination result, which is a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more abnormal states among the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine, is included in one command. The sub-control means generates the command that can be included, and when the command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means is received, the determination result information included in the received command First slave-side determining means for determining whether or not the gaming machine has become one of the abnormal states based on the above, and the determination result information transmitted by the transmitting means. When a command is received, the received command may correspond to a first determination result information corresponding to a first state of the gaming machine, and a second state corresponding to the second state which is usually incompatible with the first state. (2) second slave-side determination means for determining whether or not both of the determination result information and the second determination result information are included, and the game is performed based on the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means When it is determined by the first slave-side determining means that the machine is in any of the abnormal states, a notification according to the state is instructed to the notification means, and the second slave-side In the case where it is determined by the determination means that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included, the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed. It is. This has an effect that control of a game can be performed suitably.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation production screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern command stored in the fluctuation pattern command field. It is explanatory drawing which represented typically the structure of the buffer memory for 1st error determination. It is explanatory drawing which represented the structure of the buffer memory for 2nd error determination typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10; (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the radio wave detection device to the MPU, and (b) is the 0th buffer memory for the first error determination set in the MPU by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 3 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 4th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU And (c) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU, (b) is a second of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the inner frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is the first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 5 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 6th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the first specified winning switch to the MPU, (c) 11 is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the error determination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing radio wave detection processing executed by the MPU in the main control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing winning switch abnormality determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. And (c) is a flowchart showing a front frame opening determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a front frame opening prize determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device, and (b) an inner frame opening judgment process executed by the MPU in the main control device It is the flowchart shown. (A) is a flow chart showing a wrong prize determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device, and is a flow chart showing a vibration detection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed operation execution processing at the time of the error performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the operation execution processing at the time of the 1st error which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd error time operation execution processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the error determination processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the radio wave detection device to the MPU, and (b) is the 0th buffer memory for the first error determination set in the MPU by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 3 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 4th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU And (c) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU, (b) is a second of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of a bit. (A) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the inner frame opening switch to the MPU, (b) is the first of the first buffer memory for error judgment set in the MPU by the error judgment processing It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of 5 bits, and (c) shows the time change of the value of the 6th bit of the 1st buffer memory for error judgments set to MPU by error judgment processing. It is a timing chart. (A) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening, (b) is a timing chart showing the temporal change of the signal output from the first specified winning switch to the MPU, (c) 11 is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory set in the MPU by the error determination process. It is the flowchart which showed the operation | movement execution process at the time of the error performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the wiring abnormality determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame (glass door frame) 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, to change the effect pattern of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of the reach effect. Operated.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball inlet 64, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed by a wood screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation The symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, of the balls (retention balls) of which the fluctuation has not been executed The number of holding balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, with this pachinko machine 10, in the drawing which is done vis-a-vis the entry to the 1st ball entrance 64, while doing the success / failure decision (big hit lottery) whether or not the big hit, when it is decided that it is the big hit It also determines the As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and usually a jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) become short.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of In the high-probability state (in a definite variation) in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) to be described later is increased, and the motorized part (not shown) attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened. By becoming easy, the state of the game in which a ball is easy to enter the first ball entrance 64 is included.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases with the jackpot probability unchanged. The motorized prize associated with the first ball entry port 64 is more likely to be released, which means a gaming state in which the ball is more likely to enter the first ball entry port 64.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric role associated with the first ball entry 64 opens or the hitting in the second symbol The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed. For example, in the low probability state or the high probability state, the open time of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be longer than that in the other gaming states. Further, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the motorized combination per one time in the second symbol is larger than that of the other gaming states.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 configured by (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second ball entrance 67 The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, upper, middle and lower Three symbol rows of are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It makes a decorative display according to it. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The specific display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the center frame 86, a holding lamp 85 is disposed in the upper portion of the third symbol display device 81. The first entry ball slot 64 is until the stop symbol (15R positive variation big hit symbol, 15R normal big hit symbol, 2R positive variation big hit symbol, any one of the left symbols) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 When entering the ball, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the number of lights of the suspension lamp 85. The holding lamps 85 are provided for four for the maximum holding number, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the winning at the first entry slot 64 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times, and is three times or less, Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the reserve lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times of suspension of the variable display based on the winning on the first entrance 64 is reserved in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, color or lighting pattern) different by the number of times. Further, since the number of holding times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is possible not to perform lighting display by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 83 is a variable display that alternately lights a symbol of “o” and a symbol of “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entry hole 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first ball inlet 64 is activated only for a predetermined time (open Be configured to be). The number of times of passage of the second ball entrance 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically on the lower portion of the third symbol display device 81 of the center frame 86.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery for a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the fluctuation display is stopped, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol according to the lottery result is the third symbol display The stop display is made on the effective line L1 of the device 81. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  The first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center of the first variable winning device 65. . Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first large opening 65a, and a first large opening for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a solenoid (not shown). The first large opening 65a is normally in a closed state (closed state) in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of "15R probability variation big hit", drive the first large opening solenoid to tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, temporarily open state (open state) the ball is easy to win the first large opening 65a , And operate so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the side of the first ball entrance 64 (the left side in FIG. 2), and the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a has a horizontally long rectangular shape. It is provided. Specifically, the second variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second large opening 650a, and a second large opening for opening / closing driving forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And a solenoid (not shown). Like the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a is normally in a closed state (closed state) in which the ball can not be won or is difficult to be won. When a big hit other than "15R probability variation big hit" is generated, the second large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball is easily opened in the second large open port 650a The open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state at the normal time are alternately repeated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, one of the large opening 65a, 650a normally closed is alternately opened and closed alternately for a predetermined time.

  The opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), and the opening and closing operation of the second opening 650a can be up to 15 times (15 rounds) or 2 times 2 rounds) are made repeatable. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. For example, when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the first large opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball is open first during the opening of the first large opening 65a. A gaming state in which the second large opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state, triggered by winning into the mouth 65a. In addition, when only one first large opening 65a is provided as the specific winning opening arranged on the game board 13, when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is lit, the first large opening 65a A game state may be formed as a special game state, in which the game player repeats opening and closing a predetermined number of times every predetermined time.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 4 is a view for explaining the fluctuation effect screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a schematic view showing an actual screen and an effective line setting when the fluctuation effect is horizontally scrolled.

  The third design consists of 10 main designs consisting of 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9", and one type of sub-pattern formed smaller than this main design (in this embodiment, , And a picture of shellfish). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute symbol rows by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of the numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, a big hit lottery is performed, and in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is combined with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37a). Execute the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the symbol. The variation effect is performed such that the main symbol and the sub symbol periodically (rightwardly scroll) scroll from right to left (in the direction of the arrow X) for each symbol row with periodicity. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, at the time of this horizontal scroll, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed on each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3, the numbers in the main symbol are arranged in ascending order. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 4, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Therefore, a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right upward line L4, and a left upward line L5 are set as effective lines. And, at the time of the stop of the fluctuation production which scrolls to the side at the time of each game, the jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot if the combination of jackpot symbols (for example, the combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any of the activated lines . In the case of the horizontal scroll, the fluctuation effect stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2.

  And the combination of the jackpot symbols aligned on one effective line is the combination of the same odd symbols (the main symbols to which the odd numbers are associated), that is, “1” “1” “1” “3” “3” "If it is either" 3 "," 5 "" 5 "" 5 "" 7 "" 7 "" 7 "or" 9 "" 9 "" 9 ", as" 15R probability variation jackpot " While the jackpot moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the first large opening 65a is opened and closed 15 times at maximum (15 rounds), and then the gaming state transitions to the "high probability state".

  In addition, the combination of jackpot symbols aligned on one effective line is the combination of the same even symbols (main symbols to which even numbers are associated), that is, “0” “0” “0” “2” “2” In the case of “2”, “4” “4” “4” “4” “6” “6” “6” or “8” “8” “8”, “15R normal jackpot” While the jackpot animation is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the second large opening 650a is opened and closed 15 times at maximum (15 rounds), and then the gaming state is "low probability state", but "time-shortening Transition to state.

  Furthermore, when the combination of jackpot symbols arranged on one effective line is a chance eye of "3" "4" "1", the jackpot moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "2R probability variation jackpot". While being displayed, the second large opening port 650a is opened and closed up to twice (two rounds), and then the gaming state transitions to the "high probability state".

  As described above, the third symbol display device 81 executes the fluctuation display of the third symbol in response to the winning of the first ball entrance 64, and the third symbol displayed and stopped on the effective line as a result of the fluctuation effect The player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the jackpot type determination if the result is a jackpot by the combination of the above. Therefore, the player can have an expectation of becoming a big hit and an expectation that the gaming state becomes a high probability state by the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, thereby enhancing the interest for the game. It is possible to

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is constituted by an 8-bit microcomputer, and the ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and various data etc. temporarily when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices in order for the main control device 110 to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate. In the present embodiment, various commands are composed of 2 bytes, and 8-bit parallel data includes the first byte via the main control unit 110 and the input / output ports 205, 215, 225 of the sub control unit, It is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in the order of the second byte.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 instructs the sub control device to operate, various commands for that are temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. Then, when the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23) is executed, the set various commands are transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the sub control apparatus.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the ROM 202, as fixed value data used to control these processes, a big hit random number table used for big hit lottery, a big hit type table used to decide a big hit type, a variation pattern table used to decide a variation pattern, etc. At least stored.

  In addition, in the RAM 203, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in the second symbol display device 83, etc.) are controlled. There are various counters to do this.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  In the jackpot lottery, the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selection of the jackpot symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 23). Furthermore, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process. The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the update timing of the counter for each counter, and uses the value of the counter. Make an update.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). In the reserve area, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer according to the timing of entering the first entry ball slot 64 are used. It is an area for temporary storage (pending). Also, the execution area stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the change pattern of the big hit lottery and the change effect and the stop type at the start timing of the change. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer at that time Are stored in one of the first to fourth areas reserved.

  At this time, when there is no hold in the hold area and all the first to fourth areas are vacant, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first and second areas for storage, the value of each counter is stored in the third area for reservation. If there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the fourth area.

  Thus, the values of the counters acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning may be stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of start winnings. it can. When the start winning combination is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to at most four start winnings.

  Further, at the start timing of the fluctuation effect, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area, and Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the jackpot lottery, and the determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of stop symbol are performed.

  In addition, after the value of each counter in the first reserve area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the second reserve area is shifted to the first reserve area which is free and stored in the third reserve area. The value of each counter is shifted to the reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area, the holding is reduced by one, and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 was sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reached the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899) It is done by returning to 0 after. In the case where the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is executed, but also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

  The value of the first collision random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is the value of the random number (large jack random number; also referred to as a winning value) Play a jackpot lottery.

  The value of the jackpot random number (jump random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first stored in the execution area of the holding sphere storage area If the value of the per-random number counter C1 matches the per-random number value set by the per-big random number table, it is determined as a big hit, and the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the pending storage area is a big hit random If it does not match the numerical value, it is determined to be out.

  Here, the jackpot random number table is a jackpot random number value referred to in the gaming state low probability state (that is, a period that is not in the definite change), and a big hit randomness that is referred to in the gaming condition high probability state (ie in the definite change). It is divided into numerical values, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the jackpot random number table in association with the “low probability state”. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the high probability state is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, "448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table in association with the "high probability state" It is done.

  When making a big hit lottery, the MPU 201 reads a big hit random number value that matches the playing state at that time from the big hit random number table. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area) used for the big hit lottery is one of the big hit random numbers read from the big hit random number table. It is determined whether or not they match, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is achieved.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is in the low probability state, the first hit is made when the value of the random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the case of the low probability state is 1/300. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, A jackpot occurs when it matches any one of “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit randomness of the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table in the low probability state and the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The numerical value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and it is likely that the jackpot may be improperly attracted. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), The first hit random number counter C1 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that goes out, the fluctuation pattern or , The type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserve area in the reserve sphere storage area is a random number that makes a big win, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect become the one at the big win. In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-9. The jackpot type is determined based on the first collision type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. In the pachinko machine 10, as described above, four types of jackpot types are provided: 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot.

  In the jackpot type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each of these jackpot types. In the present embodiment, the value "0 to 3" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "4 to 7" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 15R regular jackpot The value "8, 9" of the first type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that results in a big hit, a big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "2", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "6," the big hit type If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "9", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first collision type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of becoming out of position, for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the type of stop selected in this embodiment, after reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and after the same reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (rendering) patterns: "reach other than out of front and back" where "stops" except before and after reach symbol and "complete out" where reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), It is stored in any one of the pending first to fourth areas provided in the pending ball storage area. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that goes out, the stop type in the fluctuation effect is , It will be the one at the time of removal. In this case, the type of stop at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to 98, 99 for “front and back out of reach”, 90 to 97 for “front and back out of reach”, “front and back out of reach” and “reach other than for back and forth out” is narrow It becomes difficult to select out-of-reach and out-of-front reach.

  In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter used to determine a fluctuation pattern, and is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198) It has become. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a round trip process (see FIG. 17) to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 23).

  At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be executed. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation.

  That is, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 select the third symbol from among the variation modes in which the variation display can be performed in the variation time The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, in accordance with the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 causes the sound output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. While making it output, the lamp | ramp of the lamp display apparatus 227 (electric decoration parts 29-33) is made to light-up and blink-display.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time can be determined by decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer and can not perform complicated processing, but when the change pattern is determined, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the change time. As compared with the case where the detail of the variation mode is determined by the main controller 110, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be performed easily. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control apparatus 113 etc., and the command necessary for the notification may be There is a risk that it will have to be composed of bytes or more, and sending and receiving of commands may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, so if the voice lamp control device 113 or the like is notified of only the information related to the determined fluctuation time Well, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the transmission and reception of the command becomes complicated. In addition, even if only the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is determined in main controller 110, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 determines the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time among many fluctuation modes. Since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the fluctuation display in the determined fluctuation mode, a variety of fluctuation effects can be given to the player, thereby improving the player's interest be able to.

  The fluctuation time determined here is appropriately set according to the model of the pachinko machine 10. The ROM 202 stores a variation pattern table different for each model, and a variation time different for each model is determined by the variation pattern table.

  As the fluctuation pattern table, the first fluctuation pattern table used at 15R probability variation big hit and 15R normal jackpot, the second variation pattern table used at 2R probability variation big hit, and the kind of stop other than reach or not reach A third variation pattern table, which is sometimes used, and a fourth variation pattern table, which is used when the stop type is completely out, are prepared. In addition, the fourth variation pattern table, depending on whether the game state is a short time state (including the time of probability variation of hitting the second symbol increased (high probability state of the third symbol)), according to A fourth variation pattern table and a non-time-shorting fourth variation pattern table are prepared.

  When determining the fluctuation pattern, the MPU 201 is a jackpot performed based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area. The fluctuation pattern table to be used is extracted from the first to fourth fluctuation pattern tables based on the lottery, the judgment of the jackpot type, the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the playing state at that time (whether the time saving state or not). Then, according to the extracted fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is determined by specifying the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer at that time.

  In the first variation pattern table used at 15R probability variation big hit and 15R normal big hit, as a variation pattern to be selected, normal reach variation (variation time 20 seconds), super reach A variation (variation time 30 seconds), and super reach B variation (Variation time 60 seconds) and Super Reach C variation (Variation time 90 seconds) are prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern. In the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 10” is associated with normal reach variation, and “11 to 99” is associated with super reach A variation. “100 to 189” for the super reach B fluctuation and “190 to 198” for the super reach C fluctuation.

  In the second variation pattern table used for 2R probability variation big hit, 2R dedicated A variation (variation time 25 seconds) and 2R dedicated B variation (variation time 35 seconds) are prepared as selected variation patterns, The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern. As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 49” is corresponded to the 2R dedicated A fluctuation, and “50 to 198” is corresponded to the 2R dedicated B fluctuation. It is attached.

  In the third change pattern table used when the stop type is a reach other than the front-rear reach or the front-rear out, the above-mentioned normal reach fluctuation (the fluctuation time 20 seconds) and the super reach A fluctuation (the fluctuation time) are selected as fluctuation patterns to be selected. 30 seconds) and super reach B fluctuation (variation time 60 seconds) are prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. In the association between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is associated with normal reach variation, and “100 to 159” is associated with super reach A variation. “160 to 198” is associated with the super reach B change.

  The fourth variation pattern table for time reduction, which is used when the stop type is completely out, is selected at the time reduction state (including the probability change when the probability of hitting the second pattern increases (the high probability state of the third pattern)) Short deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time 7 seconds) and long deviation fluctuation (fluctuation time 10 seconds) are prepared, and the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. . As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the present embodiment, “0 to 190” is corresponded to the short deviation fluctuation, and “191 to 198” is corresponded to the long deviation fluctuation. ing.

  In addition, in a state other than the time saving state (including the probability change when the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased (the high probability state of the third symbol)), the fourth variation for non-time shortening used when the stop type is completely out Similar to the fourth variation pattern table for time shortening, the pattern table is prepared with the short variation (variation time 7 seconds) and the long variation (variation time 10 seconds) as the variation pattern to be selected. However, the association of the value of the variation type counter CS1 with each variation pattern is different from that of the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction. As for the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the fourth variation pattern table for non-time shortening of the present embodiment, “0 to 99” is associated with the short deviation fluctuation, and the super reach fluctuation is “100 to 198” are associated with each other.

  Here, the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time reduction state (including the probability variation when the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased (the high probability state of the third symbol)) Since there is, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 easily. Therefore, if a relatively long out-of-range fluctuation of fluctuation time is frequently performed despite being completely out of time while in the time saving state, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, and the player waits for It is possible to give the player a feeling of discomfort. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole.

  Therefore, in the case of complete removal, when the gaming state is in the short time state (including the probability change time when the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased (including the high probability state of the third symbol)), the gaming state is usually excluding the short time state Configure the fourth variation pattern table for time reduction and the fourth variation pattern table for non-time reduction so that the short variation with a short variation time is more easily selected than the long variation, as compared to the state (non-short condition) By performing the start of the next variable display early, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  Although the fluctuation pattern is selected using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it is selected by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (for example, another fluctuation type counter selects the presence / absence of notice display, etc.) You may. In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the other variation type counter whether or not the first symbol (or third symbol) to be finally stopped is shifted (for example, one symbol is deviated back and forth etc.) It may be determined by

  In addition, although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the case of complete deviation was divided into the fourth fluctuation pattern table for time saving and the fourth fluctuation pattern table for non-time shortening, the gaming state is not the time saving state. Even in the non-time-short state), if there are multiple (for example, 3 or more if the maximum number of 4) holding balls, the variable display may be ended early, so the time-saving off (probable change) change It may be selected with reference to the pattern table, or may be configured to prepare a variation pattern table for time saving or non-time saving corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Further, the association between the variation pattern in each variation pattern table and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10. By making the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 different for each model, the probability that each fluctuation pattern is selected can be changed in each model.

  Moreover, although the case where the 1st-4th fluctuation pattern table was prepared was demonstrated in the said description, according to the specification of the model of the pachinko machine 10, you may prepare a fluctuation pattern table.

  As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, 1 is added sequentially in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250) It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired when The number of random numbers to be won is 2 in a non-time-saving state, and the range is “240 to 241”. Further, the number of random numbers to be won is 225 in the short time state, and the range is “5 to 229”.

  That is, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state, it is determined that the winning is performed when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 229”. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the non-time-short state, it is determined that the winning is performed when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “241 to 242”. And in the case of a hit, while the symbol of "(circle)" is light-displayed as a stop symbol (2nd symbol) on the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the 1st ball entrance 64 is opened only for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17). It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 23).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, according to the value of the counters etc., the jackpot lottery, the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various tables such as the big hit random number table, the big hit type table, and the variation pattern table described above, the ROM 202 also includes various commands to be sent to the respective sub control devices (such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). An area for storing data is provided, and the area includes a variation pattern command area 202b.

  Here, the variation pattern command 202 b is an area for storing data of the variation pattern command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Here, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command area 202b. The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the main controller 110.

  Here, the command output from main controller 110 to each sub-control device consists of 2 bytes, and this variation pattern command indicates that the upper byte (upper 8 bits) is the variation pattern command. Composed of the value "F1h", and the lower byte (lower 8 bits) of the variation pattern command indicates the variation time determined by the main controller 110.

  Specifically, the lower byte "10h" of the variation pattern command indicates that the variation time is 7 seconds, the lower byte "12h" of the variation pattern command indicates that the variation time is 10 seconds, and the variation pattern command The lower byte "14h" of the indicates that the change time is 20 seconds, the lower byte "16h" of the change pattern command indicates that the change time is 30 seconds, and the change is caused by the lower byte "18h" of the change pattern command It indicates that the time is 60 seconds, the lower byte "20h" of the fluctuation pattern command indicates that the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, and the fluctuation time is 25 seconds by the lower byte "22h" of the fluctuation pattern command. Change time is 35 seconds by the lower byte "24h" of the change pattern command. Shows the Rukoto.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command "F110h", it determines that the variation time determined by the main control device 110 is 7 seconds, and selects a short deviation variation of 7 seconds as the specific variation mode. The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 that the variation effect is performed in the selected short deviation variation. When the fluctuation pattern command "F112h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 10 seconds, and the selected fluctuation is selected by selecting the 10 seconds long fluctuation as the specific fluctuation mode. The display control device 114 is notified that the fluctuation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 due to the fluctuation. When the fluctuation pattern command “F114h” is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is determined to be 20 seconds, and one of a plurality of 20 seconds of normal reach fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The display control device 114 is notified that the variation effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the selected normal reach variation.

  When the fluctuation pattern command "F116h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 30 seconds, and one of a plurality of 30 seconds of super reach A fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach A change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F118h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main control unit 110 is judged to be 60 seconds, and one of a plurality of 60 seconds of super reach B fluctuation is selected as the concrete fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach B change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F120h" is received, it is determined that the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is 90 seconds, and one of a plurality of 90 seconds of super reach C fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected super reach C change so that the change effect is performed.

  When the fluctuation pattern command "F122h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main control unit 110 is judged to be 25 seconds, and one of a plurality of 25 seconds 2R dedicated A fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected 2R dedicated A change so that the change effect is performed. When the fluctuation pattern command "F124h" is received, the fluctuation time determined by the main controller 110 is determined to be 35 seconds, and one of a plurality of 35 seconds of 2R dedicated B fluctuation is selected as the specific fluctuation mode The third symbol display device 81 notifies the display control device 114 of the selected 2R-dedicated B change so that the change effect is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the main controller 110 will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like are stored in addition to the counter buffer and holding ball storage area shown in FIG. There are work areas (work areas) in which various flags, counters, values of I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 23), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203 has a holding ball number counter 203a. The holding ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waits) up to four times. In this holding ball number counter 203a, the initial value (value set in the RAM initial setting (S714) executed after the power is turned on) is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64. Each time the number of balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S403 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable display based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (see S205 in FIG. 16).

  If there is a ball entry into the first entry ball slot 64 (start winning combination), if the number-of-held ball number counter 203a is less than 4, then the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern at that time Each value of the selection counter C3 is obtained from the counter buffer and stored in the holding ball storage area. On the other hand, if the holding ball counter 203a is 4, it means that four holding balls have already been held, so the start winning is ignored.

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S405 in FIG. 20). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one after being entered into the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and lights the holding lamps 85 for the number of holding balls. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 holds the number of balls in the variable display suspended by the main controller 110 by the number of balls retained command transmitted from the main controller 110 whenever the number-of-balls counter 203 a is incremented by one. You can get the value of itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the number of holding balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the ball has been dropped, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The RAM 203 further includes a first error determination buffer memory 203 b and a second error determination buffer memory 203 c. Here, configurations of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b and the second error determination buffer memory 203 c will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 9 is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. In the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred by the error determination process (S102) (that is, the state where the pachinko machine 10 can normally play a game) Is a memory for storing an error command in which the determination result is stored and the result is reflected.

  Although the details will be described later, the error determination process (S102) is a process that is executed in a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every 2 ms, and among a plurality of types of errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 For each type of error, based on the values of various flags and counters, and input signals from various switches and sensors 208 connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, It is a process to determine. Through this process, each area (each bit) of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is information indicating the occurrence status of an error of the type corresponding to each area (information indicating the occurrence of an error, occurrence of an error) Information) is stored, and information indicating the occurrence of another type of error is stored in a partial area (partial bits) of the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the first error determination buffer memory 203b is a memory composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the next error is determined by the error determination process (S102) in each bit of the memory 203b. Information indicating the occurrence status of is stored. That is, information indicating the occurrence status of "radio wave detection error" is stored in the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and information indicating the occurrence status of "winning error when opening the front frame" is provided in the 1st bit Is stored, and the second bit stores information indicating the occurrence status of the “winning switch abnormal error”. Further, the third bit stores information indicating whether the front frame (glass door frame) 14 is opened, and the fourth bit stores information indicating whether the front frame 14 is closed. As a result, the third bit and the fourth bit store information indicating the occurrence status of the “front frame opening error”. The fifth bit stores information indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 is released, and the sixth bit stores information indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 is closed. The 5th and 6th bits store information indicating the occurrence of the "inner frame opening error". Further, the seventh bit stores information indicating the occurrence status of the "first incorrect winning error". The details of various errors will be described later.

  Then, the information (value) indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of errors stored in the first error determination buffer memory 203 b and the information (fixed value) indicating that it is an error command including those information In addition, an error command of 1 is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the error command is composed of 2 bytes. The lower byte of the error command generated based on the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b uses the value of the memory 203b as it is, and the upper byte of the error command is generated based on the memory 203b. Configured with a fixed value "DDh" specific to the error command being sent.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the second error determination buffer memory 203c is a memory configured of 1 byte (8 bits) as in the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and the error determination process (S102) is performed. Information is stored in the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and the 1st bit in the memory 203b stores the error command. Information indicating whether or not a vibration of a predetermined value level (intensity) is detected by a vibration sensor 208g described later is stored, and the vibration (intensity) detected by the vibration sensor 208g is less than a predetermined value level in the second bit Information indicating whether the “vibration detection error” has occurred is stored in the first bit and the second bit. It is paid. There is no error assigned to the remaining bits (that is, the third to seventh bits) of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and "0" is always stored in each of the remaining bits. The details of various errors will be described later.

  Then, information (values) indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of errors stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c and a fixed value indicating that the information is an error command including the information are combined (added ), An error command of 1 is generated. The lower byte of the error command generated based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is used as it is, and the upper byte of the error command is generated based on the memory 203c. It is configured by a fixed value "DEh" specific to an error command to be performed.

  Each error command generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. The error command set in the ring buffer is then used as an 8-bit parallel data in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device It is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 in the order of the upper byte and the lower byte via the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of 113.

  Although details will be described later, when an error command of 1 is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 analyzes information indicating the occurrence status of various errors included in the command and generates the error command. Perform notification according to the type of error that has occurred. As a result, since the occurrence of an error and the type of the occurrence can be reported to a person in charge at the game arcade, the person in charge at the game arcade can promptly take action according to the error that has occurred.

  Also, since each error command generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c includes information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of different types of errors, one error command is generated. The voice lamp control device 113 can be notified of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors simply by transmitting.

  For example, occurrence of each error of “radio wave detection error”, “front frame opening prize error”, “prize switch abnormal error”, “front frame opening error”, “inner frame opening error” and “first incorrect prize error” When information indicating the status is transmitted by separate error commands, the main controller 110 transmits at most six error commands at one time to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, assuming that each error command is composed of 2 bytes in the same manner as the error command of the present embodiment, the main control unit 110 generates a maximum of 12 bytes of information as an error command. Will be sent to.

  Also, when information indicating the occurrence status of each of the “first incorrect prize error” and the “vibration detection error” is transmitted by separate error commands, the main control device 110 transmits it to the voice lamp control device 113 at one time. Assuming that the maximum number of error commands is 2 and each error command is composed of 2 bytes as described above, the main control unit 110 controls the voice lamp to transmit 4 bytes of information at maximum as an error command. It will be sent to the device 113.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “radio wave detection error” is generated only by transmitting one command of 2 bytes generated by the main control device 110 based on the value of the first error determination memory 203b. , "Voice in front frame opening error", "Prize switch error", "front frame opening error", "inner frame opening error" and "first incorrect prize error" information indicating the occurrence of each error, voice Only by notifying the lamp control device 113 at one time, and by transmitting only one 2-byte command generated by the main control device 110 based on the value of the second error determination memory 203 c The sound lamp control device 113 is notified at a time of information indicating the occurrence status of each of the “vibration detection error” errors.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors in one command is generated based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c. Since the error command including is transmitted, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced compared to the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands.

  Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 can be suitably performed.

  Note that notification of an error by the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed by emitting light from the illumination portions 29 to 33 such as LEDs disposed on the periphery of the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, and sound from a speaker (not shown). It is performed by any one of the output, the display on the 7-segment display 37b, and the like, or a combination thereof.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 8 and 9, various errors indicated by the value of each bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b and the values of each bit of second error determination buffer memory 203c Describe various errors.

  First, various errors indicated by the value of each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b will be described.

  The “radio wave detection error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that a radio wave equal to or higher than a set value level is detected (detected) by a radio wave detection device 208a described later. As an example of fraudulent acts, there is an act of irradiating radio waves to various MPUs, various switches, various sensors, etc., causing each to malfunction, and causing a jackpot lottery or a payout of balls to be generated illegally. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is notified of the situation where the radio wave of the set value or more is irradiated as a "radio wave detection error".

  Although the details will be described later, the radio wave detection device 208a outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 when it detects a radio wave of a set value or more. The MPU 201 determines that a "radio wave detection error" has occurred based on the on signal from the radio wave detection device 208a, sets "0" to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and "radio wave detection" It stores the determination result that an error has occurred. After that, the occurrence of “radio wave detection error” is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. As a result, the occurrence of the "radio wave detection error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  "Front frame opening prize error" is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 has been detected while the front frame (glass door) 14 is open. Error. In the state where the front frame (glass door) 14 is open, anyone can touch the game board 13, so the ball detected in such a state does not cause the game ball to be fired by the launcher, and the hand or tool is released. There is a possibility that the prize is won by the fraudulent act of entering the prize opening directly using. Therefore, in the state where the front frame (glass door) 14 is opened, the situation where the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first entrance 64 is detected is exemplified above as "presence frame open prize error". It enables early detection of fraudulent activity.

  Although the details will be described later, a signal (an on signal of the front frame open switch 208e) output to the MPU 201 when the front frame (glass door) 14 is open (opened) from the front frame open switch 208e and a start described later Based on the detection signal of the ball (on signal from the start winning switch 208) output when the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the winning switch 208, the MPU 201 “opens the front frame It is determined that the hour winning error has occurred, and the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1". Thereafter, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “front frame opening prize error” by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. As a result, the occurrence of the "front frame opening prize error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The "prize switch abnormal error" is a start winning switch 208b for detecting the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry (opening) 64, a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the first entry 64 This is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the detection of the sphere continues even if (for example, 0.2 seconds or more) is exceeded.

  When the ball of 1 continues to be detected by the start winning switch 208 b after the time sufficient for the ball of 1 to pass through the first ball entrance 64, failure of the switch 208 b or the first ball entrance In addition to the occurrence of ball clogging at 64, there is a possibility that the following fraudulent acts are being conducted. That is, by attaching an illegal device (for example, a so-called "Goto ball") to the winning opening, transmitting a radio signal (such as radio waves) to the device, and changing the state of the device, the winning opening has no actual condition. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts to detect winnings have been conducted. Therefore, when a ball is being detected, the output period of the detection signal (ON signal) output from the start winning switch 208b has a sufficient time (for example, 0.2 seconds) to pass through the first entrance 64. When the output is longer than the above, the MPU 201 determines that the "prize switch abnormal error" has occurred, and sets "1" to the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Thereafter, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" by an error command generated based on the first error determination buffer memory 203b. As a result, the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "radio wave detection error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The “front frame opening error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the open state of the front frame 14 is detected by a front frame opening switch 208 e described later. If the front frame 14 is open, the game board 13 is modified to make it easy for the ball to enter each winning opening, or the winning opening 63, 64, 65a is detected as having a solid ball. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as the attachment of a trap may be carried out. Therefore, the MPU 201 generates a “front frame open error” based on a signal (on signal) output when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the open state (open state) of the front frame (glass door) 14. It determines that it has been set, sets "1" to the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “front frame opening error”, that is, the front frame 14 is opened. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies that the front frame 14 is opened by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like. When the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the fourth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  On the other hand, based on the signal (off signal) output when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the closed state of the front frame 14, the MPU 201 determines that the “front frame open error” is released. The fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1" to generate an error command. Then, by transmitting this command to the audio lamp control device 113, it is confirmed that the front frame 14 is closed to the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the "front frame open error" is released. Notice. At this time, if the sound lamp control device 113 is executing notification of "front frame opening error", the notification corresponding to "front frame opening error" is ended. Since the notification is ended when the front frame 14 is closed, it is possible to notify an attendant or the like of the game arcade having the front frame 14 closed that the front frame 14 has been closed. When the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the third bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  The “inner frame open error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the open state of the inner frame 12 is detected by an inner frame open switch 208 f described later. When the inner frame 12 is opened, as described above, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as unauthorized attachment of the game board 13 or the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, etc. may be performed. The main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 disposed on the back side of the game board 13 and performing control related to the payout of balls are subjected to fraudulent acts in which an illegal substrate such as a so-called "hanging substrate" is attached There is a risk of Therefore, it is assumed that the “inner frame open error” occurs based on the signal (on signal) output when the inner frame open switch 208 f detects the open state (open state) of the inner frame 12. The MPU 201 sets "1" in the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, generates an error command, and transmits it to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the “inner frame opening error” (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the inner frame 12 is opened by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like. When the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the sixth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 does not generate the “inner frame open error” based on the signal (off signal) output when the inner frame open switch 208 f detects the closed state (closed state) of the inner frame 12. It is determined that the first error determination buffer memory 203b is set to "1" to generate an error command, which is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the inner frame 12 is closed, that is, the "inner frame open error" is released. At this time, if the voice lamp control device 113 is executing notification of the “inner frame opening error”, the voice lamp control device 113 ends the notification corresponding to the “inner frame opening error”. Since the notification is ended when the inner frame 12 is closed, it is possible to notify an employee or the like of the game arcade who closed the inner frame 12 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. When the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the fifth bit of the memory 203 b to “0”.

  The “first fraudulent winning error” is an entry into the first large opening 65a despite the period in which the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a is not open (ie, closed). This is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that the ball has been detected by the first specific winning switch 208c described later. As described above, the first large opening 65a is in the open state at the time of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot, and other than this, it is in the closed state in which the ball can not enter. Therefore, if the ball entering the first large opening 65a is detected during a period when the first large opening 65a does not enter the open state, the first large opening 65a is illegally opened to play the game. There is a possibility that fraudulent conduct is being conducted. In addition, there is a possibility that a failure of the first specific winning switch 208c or a ball clogging in the first large opening 65a may occur. Therefore, in such a case, the MPU 201 determines that the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred, sets "1" in the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and generates an error command. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the occurrence of the "first incorrect prize error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0", the notification corresponding to the "first incorrect prize error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203b.

  The various errors whose judgment results are stored in each bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b by the error judgment processing (S102) described above are likely to be adopted even in models different from the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Error related to the high configuration (ie, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present application is a highly probable error which is required to be notified even in a model having different game contents and game characteristics. Therefore, even in models having different configurations, game contents, game characteristics, etc., the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh" can be used repeatedly to create the program etc. It makes it easy to create a pachinko machine that reports the occurrence of an error.

  On the other hand, the various errors stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c by the error determination process (S102) described below have significant importance of error notification depending on the game content and game characteristics of the pachinko machine It is an error that depends on the game content or the playability of each model, which is changed or there is no target for error. Also in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various types of errors whose determination results are stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c are required to be notified by the model of the pachinko machine 10, but with the pachinko machine 10 There is a high possibility that notification will not be performed or become unnecessary on another model. Therefore, when creating a program for a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, the code of the error command of the upper byte "DEh" may be assigned to an error specific to that pachinko machine.

  The “second fraudulent winning error” is an error related to the second large opening (the second specified winning opening) 650a. The determination result of the “second incorrect prize winning error” is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203 c for the following reason. That is, in models different from the pachinko machine 10, there are many that place only one winning opening similar to the first large opening 65a and the second large opening 650a in the game area to play a game, and have both It is because there are few things that play a game.

  The “second fraudulent winning error” is generated by a second specified winning switch 208d described later, regardless of the period when the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a is not open (ie, closed). This is an error that is notified when it is determined by the MPU 201 that entry into the second large opening port 650a has been detected. Similarly to the first large opening 65a, the second large opening 650a is in a closed state in which the ball can not enter normally, and is in an open state when a 15R normal big hit or a 2R positive variation big hit occurs. Therefore, if the ball entering the second large opening 650a is detected during a period when the second large opening 650a does not enter the open state, the second large opening 650a is illegally opened to play the game. Cheating, failure of the second specified winning switch 208d, ball clogging in the second large opening 650a, and the like may occur. Therefore, in such a case, the MPU 201 determines that the “second incorrect winning error” has occurred. In this case, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the occurrence of the "second incorrect winning error" can be notified by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, or the like.

  On the other hand, when the zeroth bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is "0", the notification corresponding to the "second incorrect prize error" is not performed in the error command generated based on the memory 203c.

  The “vibration detection error” is an error that is notified when the MPU 201 determines that a vibration equal to or higher than a set value level is detected (detected) by a vibration sensor 208 a described later. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the ball entry is an important factor in determining the gaming state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration, and the ball is intentionally prevented from entering the ball entry. There is a need. Therefore, when vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10, there is a request to stop the game. On the other hand, if the game is immediately stopped when the vibration is given, the game will be stopped even if the player in good intentions unexpectedly shakes the pachinko machine 10, and the player is There is a risk of distrust in the game arcade.

  Therefore, when the number of times the vibration above the set value level is given to the pachinko machine 10 is less than the predetermined number, only notification to the attendants of the game arcade by the light emission mode of the lamp, the sound from the speaker, etc. "Vibration detection error" to be performed is generated.

  In this case, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c, generates an error command, and transmits it to the audio lamp control device 113. When the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is set to “1”, the MPU 201 sets the second bit of the memory 203c to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 has been eliminated based on the output of the vibration sensor 208 g, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c. To generate an error command and send it to the voice lamp controller 113. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the “vibration detection error” is released. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 executing the notification corresponding to the “vibration detection error” receives this error command, the voice lamp control device 113 ends the notification corresponding to the “vibration detection error”. As a result, it is possible to notify a staff member of the game arcade that the pachinko machine 10 is no longer vibrated. When the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c is set to "1", the MPU 201 sets the first bit of the memory 203c to "0".

  It should be noted that "vibration detection error" is temporarily notified on models assuming a game in which the pachinko machine is given a certain degree of vibration, such as a game in which the display mode of the fluctuation effect is changed by continuous hitting and hitting of the presentation button. In such a case, a "vibration detection error" caused by the depression of the effect button occurs, and the notification becomes troublesome. Therefore, in such a model, it is difficult to adopt the "vibration detection error". Therefore, the determination result of the "vibration detection error" is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  Further, when it is determined by the MPU 201 that vibration more than the set value level is frequently given to the pachinko machine 10 from the output of the vibration sensor 208g, processing of “vibration stop error” is performed. In this case, an error command unique to the "vibration stop error" consisting of 2 bytes stored in an error command storage area (not shown) of the ROM 202 is fired via the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111. It transmits to the control device 112. As a result, the firing control device 112 stops the firing of the gaming ball and stops the game, and the voice lamp control device 113 drives the lamp or the speaker in a manner more noticeable than the "vibration detection error" The occurrence of an error is reported.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, there is no error allocated to the third to seventh bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and "0" is always stored in each of the bits. I am trying to Therefore, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh" generated based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, the values of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are all "0". It is a command.

  The main control unit 110 also determines the occurrence of occurrences of errors different in type from the errors described here, and the determination result is output to the first error determination buffer memory 203b and the second error determination buffer. It may be stored in the memory 203 c and notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by an error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh”.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the “front frame winning when opening error” is an error that occurs in the start winning switch 208b, but a similar error detects passage of the ball in the first large opening 65a. It is also conceivable that the first specific winning switch 208b and a general winning switch (not shown) for detecting passage of a ball in the general winning opening 63 may be generated in each of the switches provided in each winning opening. Therefore, the occurrence of the “front frame prize opening error” in each of these switches is also determined in the error determination processing, and the result is the bit area of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b or the second error. It may be stored in the bit area of the determination buffer memory 203c.

  At this time, even if one of the first or second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c is generated in any of the switches provided in each of the winning openings, an "error on opening of the front frame" is generated. The generation information may be allocated (turned on), and separate bits may be allocated to the “front frame winning opening error” of each winning switch, and the “front frame” of each winning switch Information on the occurrence of the winning opening error may be stored in separate bits.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "prize switch abnormal error" is also an error that occurs in the start winning switch 208b, but a similar error also occurs in the other switches provided in each winning opening. It is possible to do. Therefore, the occurrence of the "winning switch abnormal error" in each of these switches is also determined in the error determination processing, and the result is displayed in the bit area of the first error determination buffer memory 203b or for the second error determination. It may be stored in the bit area of the buffer memory 203c.

  At this time, even if one bit of the first or second error determination buffer memory 203b or 203c is generated in any of the switches provided with the "winning switch abnormal error" in each winning opening, the error occurrence information May be assigned to be stored (turned on), and separate bits may be assigned to the "winning switch abnormal error" of each winning switch, and the "winning switch abnormal error" of each winning switch may be allocated. The generated information may be stored in separate bits.

  In addition, many models have at least one configuration similar to the first specific winning switch 208b and a general winning switch (not shown), and "the front frame winning in each one switch" Since "time opening error" and "winning switch abnormal error" can occur regardless of the game content and the game nature of each model, "front frame winning opening error" and "winning switch abnormality in each one switch" Information on the occurrence of “error” is stored in any bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b that stores occurrence information of errors that occur in many models, or the first error determination buffer memory 203b and A separate memory is provided to store information on the occurrence of errors that occur in many models, and each is stored in any bit of that memory Theft is desirable. The configuration of the pachinko machine and the game content, etc., the error command code of “front frame winning at prize opening error” and “winning switch abnormal error” in each one of the first specific winning switches 208 b and the general winning switches (not shown) This is because the programs can be used repeatedly when creating programs etc. of different game characteristics, and the creation of that model can be facilitated.

  Since there are many errors that store error occurrence information that occurs in many models, if the 1-byte first error determination buffer memory 203b can not cope with it, error occurrence information that occurs in many models is stored. Preferably, another memory is provided to store error occurrence information. In this case, the upper byte of the error command generated from the memory has a value different from “DDh” and “DEh” (for example, “DCh”).

  In addition, in the second type of pachinko machine, the item provided at the center of the game board is provided with a gate with a sensor for detecting passage of the ball, such as an entrance gate and an exit gate of the game ball, There is a V switch that generates a big hit when entering the ball. Even if a predetermined time has passed after passing through the entrance gate, if the ball entry at the V switch is not detected yet and there is no output of the discharge signal from the exit gate, the fraudster will be between the two gates. There is a possibility that the ball is operated illegally with a magnet or the like. Therefore, in such a case, the second type of pachinko machine generates an “ejection error”. Such an error peculiar to the second type pachinko machine is preferably assigned to the second error determination buffer memory 203c in which information on occurrence of an error according to the feature of the model is stored.

  In models that operate mechanical characters on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, etc., during demonstration display when a game is not being played, the mechanical character is positioned at a predetermined position if firing is performed poorly during operation of the mechanical characters. There is a risk that it will not be possible to return to the case, and in this case a "firing error" will occur. Since this is also an error specific to the machine type that operates the mechanical character during demonstration display, it is desirable to store error occurrence information in the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  In addition, since errors such as “induction lever error” and “solenoid operation error” are model-specific errors that generate the respective errors, the error occurrence information is stored in the second error determination buffer memory 203c. It is desirable to do.

  There are many errors according to the characteristics of the model, so if it can not be handled by the 1-byte second error judgment buffer memory 203c, another memory for storing error occurrence information according to the characteristics of the model is provided. It is desirable to store error occurrence information there. In this case, the upper byte of the error command generated from the memory has a value different from “DDh” and “DEh” (for example, “DFh”).

  The RAM 203 further has a bit check execution flag 203d. The bit check execution flag 203 d is a flag for transmitting an error command of the upper byte “DEh” from the main control unit 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The voice lamp control unit 113 which has received this error command It is used to confirm an abnormality of the wiring 302 described later.

  The bit check execution flag 203d is turned on in the start-up process (see FIG. 22) performed at the time of power on of the main control unit 110, and in the error determination process (S102, S711, FIG. 24) executed thereafter. It is a flag to be turned off.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, values corresponding to the detection results of the various sensors 208 in the error determination processing (S102, S711) are of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c. It is stored in each bit. In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 generates an error (error) in any bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b and any bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. To determine whether or not the information indicating the occurrence or cancellation of the error is stored, and if there is a bit storing the information indicating the occurrence status of the error, the error is based on the value of the memory having the bit A command is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  At this time, if the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, regardless of the presence or absence of an error detected by the various sensors 208, an error of the upper byte “DEh” based on the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203b. A command is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, it becomes possible to cause the voice lamp control device 113 to check the bit of this command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control unit 111, an audio lamp control unit 113, a first symbol display unit 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and opening and closing plates of large opening ports 65a and 650a. Solenoid 209 which consists of each large open mouth solenoid for driving to open and close each to the front side by using the lower side as an axis, and a solenoid for driving a motorized part, etc. is connected, and MPU 201 is connected to these through input / output port 205 On the other hand, it sends various commands and control signals.

  In the present embodiment, eight (eight bits) of parallel wires 301 and 302 are used to connect the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the sub-control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113. Signal lines. Thereby, various commands to be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the sub control apparatus can be transmitted as parallel data of 8 bits.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 10, switches and sensors included at least in various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of various switches 208 of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The radio wave detection device 208 a is a sensor that detects that radio waves that cause various switches, various sensors, various MPUs, etc. to malfunction are provided in the pachinko machine 10, and are provided at a plurality of locations on the back surface of the game board 13. It is arranged. As described above, the radio wave detection device 208a irradiates radio waves to various MPUs, various switches, various sensors, etc. to cause each to malfunction and cause a big hit lottery or a ball payout to occur illegally. Used to monitor fraud.

  The radio wave detection device 208 a outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when detecting a radio wave of a level higher than the set value. When a radio wave at a level lower than the set value is detected, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is irradiated with radio waves.

  The start winning switch 208b is a switch for detecting passage of a ball at the first ball entrance (starting hole) 64, and while detecting a ball passing through the first ball entrance 64, the on signal is mainly used It outputs to the MPU 201 of the control device 110. On the other hand, when the ball is not detected, the off signal is output. Further, the first ball entry port 64 is attached to the back of the first ball entry port 64 (the back side of the game board 13).

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the ball has passed the first entrance 64. Specifically, an ON signal is output from the start winning switch 208b, and the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal (that is, detects an OFF input and an ON input successively), and then continues at least once. When the on input is detected, the MPU 201 determines that the ball is passing through the first entrance 64. Then, when the MPU 201 detects the off input within a predetermined time (maximum passage time of the ball, for example, 0.2 seconds) after detecting the rising of the on signal, the ball passes through the first entrance 64. It is determined that On the other hand, when the off input is not detected even if the maximum passage time of the sphere is exceeded, it is determined that the sphere is stagnant. At this time, notification of the above-mentioned "winning switch error" is performed.

  The first specific winning switch 208c is a switch for detecting passage of a ball in the first large opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, and detects a ball passing through the first large opening 65a. The on signal is output to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. When the ball is not detected at the first large opening 65a, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether or not the ball has passed (winning) in the first large opening 65a. In addition, the first specific winning switch 208c is attached to the back of the first large opening 65a (the back side of the game board 13).

  The second specified winning switch 208d is a switch for detecting passage of a ball in the second large opening (second specified winning opening) 650a, when detecting a ball passing through the second large opening 650a, The on signal is output to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Further, when the ball is not detected at the second large opening port 650a, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine whether the ball has passed (winning) in the second large opening 650a. Further, the second specified winning switch 208d is attached to the back of the second large opening 65a (the back side of the game board 13).

  The front frame open switch 208 e is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the front frame 14. The front frame open switch 208 e outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the open (non-closed) state of the front frame 14 is detected. On the other hand, when the closing (non-opening) of the front frame 14 is detected, the off signal is output. Thus, the MPU 201 can determine whether the front frame 14 is open or closed. The front frame opening switch 208e is provided on the cylinder lock 20, and is turned on when the front frame 14 is unlocked and turned off when the front frame 14 is locked.

  The inner frame opening switch 208 f is a switch for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12. The inner frame open switch 208 f outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the open (non-closed) state of the inner frame 12 is detected. On the other hand, when the closing (non-opening) of the inner frame 12 is detected, the off signal is output. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 respectively. The inner frame open switch 208f is provided on the cylinder lock 20, and is turned on when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and turned off when the inner frame 12 is locked.

  The vibration sensor 208 g is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10 and is disposed on the back of the game board 13. As described above, the vibration sensor 208g is used to monitor the fraudulent action of changing the flow of the ball by vibration and intentionally entering the ball entrance.

  The vibration sensor 208 g outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the level of vibration given to the pachinko machine 10 is the set value level. As a result, the MPU 201 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is being vibrated at the set value level.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14, the correspondence between the signal output from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 and the bit value of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  First, referring to FIG. 11, the correspondence between the signal output from radio wave detection device 208a to MPU 201 and the value of the 0th bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. Explain. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201. FIG. 11B is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows a temporal change of the value of the 0th bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, when the radio wave detection device 208a detects a radio wave of a predetermined value level and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal. Then, "1" indicating that the "radio wave detection error" has occurred is set to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Accordingly, the upper byte is set to "DDh" and the value of the zeroth bit of the lower byte is set to "1" by the error determination processing (S102) executed when the rising of the on signal from the radio wave detection device 208a is detected. An error command to be generated is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "radio wave detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, in the period other than the above timing, the value of the zeroth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0". When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the 0th bit of the lower byte in the command becomes "0".

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the signal output from front frame open switch 208e to MPU 201 and the third and fourth bits of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. The correspondence with each value of is described.

  FIG. 12A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208 e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 12B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. FIG. 12C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the third bit of the buffer memory 203b. FIG. 12C is the fourth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, when the front frame open switch 208e detects the open state of the front frame 14 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 causes the ON signal to rise. At the detected timing, "1" indicating that "front frame opening detection error" has occurred is set in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Here, the value of the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0" in a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the front frame open switch 208e falls from the on signal to the off signal. Maintained.

  Therefore, when the rising of the on signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination processing (S 102), and the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte Is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "front frame opening detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, when the front frame open switch 208 e detects the closed state of the front frame 14 and outputs the off signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the fall of the on signal to the off signal at the timing when the fall is detected. In the fourth bit of the memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "front frame opening detection error" has been eliminated. As described above, the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" during a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the front frame open switch 208e rises to the on signal. Ru.

  Therefore, when the fall to the off signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination process (S 102), and sets the third and fourth bits of the lower byte. An error command having a value of “0, 1” is generated, and this command notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the elimination of “front frame opening detection error”.

  Thus, in the error determination process (S102) of the main control unit 110, "1" indicating that the front frame 14 is in the open state is set in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and The fourth bit of the memory 203b is not set to "1" indicating that the front frame 14 is in the closed state. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, in which the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the third and fourth bits of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13, the first error set in MPU 201 based on the signal output from front frame open switch 208e to MPU 201, the signal output from start winning switch 208b to MPU 201, and those signal outputs. The correspondence with the value of the first bit of the determination buffer memory 203b will be described.

  FIG. 13 (a) is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 13 (b) is a timing chart of signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201. 13C is a timing chart showing a temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. .

  As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c), in the state where the front frame open switch 208e detects the open state of the front frame 14 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the start winning is further achieved. When the switch 208 b detects a ball passing through the first entrance 64 and the ON signal is output, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal at the timing when the ON signal is detected. Set “1” in 1 bit to indicate that “Folding error when opening front frame” has occurred.

  In addition, since the start winning switch 208b detects the ball passing through the first entrance 64 for a long time and the output of the on signal to the MPU 201 continues, the front frame 14 is opened, When the ON signal is output from the front frame opening switch 208e, the MPU 201 also has a "winning error when opening the front frame" in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b even at the timing when the rising of the ON signal is detected. Set "1" to indicate that it has occurred.

  When the MPU 201 simultaneously detects the rising of the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b and the rising of the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208e, the first error determination buffer memory 203b is also selected. Set “1” in 1 bit to indicate that “Folding error when opening front frame” has occurred.

  When "1" is set to the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, an error command is generated in which the upper byte is "DDh" and the value of the first bit of the lower byte is "1". The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "winning error when opening the front frame" by the command.

  On the other hand, the value of the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" during a period other than the above timing. When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the first bit of the lower byte in the command is "0".

  As for the “front frame opening prize error” whose occurrence status is indicated by the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b, as described above, the front frame 14 is in the open state (opened state And the front frame 14 is closed, and at least it does not occur at the timing when the signal from the front frame open switch 208 e falls from on to off. For this reason, in the error determination process (S102), when “1” indicating that “the front frame opening prize error” has occurred is set in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, At the same time, the fourth bit of the memory 203 b is not set to “1” indicating that the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, in which the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Referring to FIG. 14, the correspondence between the signal output from start winning switch 208b to MPU 201 and the value of the second bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. Explain the relationship. FIG. 14A is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, and FIG. 14B is for the first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination processing. It is a timing chart which shows temporal change of the value of the 2nd bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the start winning switch 208b detects a ball passing through the first entrance 64 and outputs an ON signal, and the ON signal is detected by the MPU 201. If the ON input is maintained until 0.2 s elapses from the time when the MPU 201 detects that the 0.2 s elapse, the “winning switch abnormality error” is generated in the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Set “1” to indicate that has occurred. Therefore, when the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b is maintained for 0.2 s from the rising edge, the upper byte is set to “DDh” by the error determination processing (S102) executed at the timing when the 0.2 s elapses. An error command in which the value of the second bit of the lower byte is “1” is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of “winning switch abnormal error” by this command.

  On the other hand, the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is maintained at “0” during a period other than the above timing. Therefore, when an error command of the upper byte “DDh” is transmitted in such a period, the value of the second bit of the lower byte in the command becomes “0”.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, the signal output from inner frame open switch 208f to MPU 201 and the fifth and sixth bits of first error determination buffer memory 203c set in MPU 201 based on the signal output. The correspondence with each value of is described.

  FIG. 15A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f to the MPU 201, and FIG. 15B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. FIG. 15C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the fifth bit of the buffer memory 203c. FIG. 15C is the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, when the inner frame open switch 208f detects the open state of the inner frame 12 and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the rising of the ON signal. At timing, "1" indicating that "inner frame open detection error" has occurred is set to the 5th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Here, in the period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f falls from the on signal to the off signal, “0” is given to the value of the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Maintained.

  Therefore, when the rising of the on signal from the inner frame opening switch 208f is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to "DDh" by the error determination process (S102), and the values of the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte Is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "inner frame opening detection error" by this command.

  On the other hand, when the inner frame opening switch 208f detects the closed state of the inner frame 12 and outputs the off signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 detects the fall of the on signal to the off signal at a timing when the first error determination buffer is detected. In the sixth bit of the memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "inner frame open detection error" has been eliminated. Here, “0” is maintained as the value of the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b during a period other than the timing when the detection signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208 f rises to the on signal.

  Therefore, when a fall from the inner frame opening switch 208 f to the off signal is detected, the MPU 201 sets the upper byte to “DDh” by the error determination process (S 102), and sets the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte. An error command having a value of “0, 1” is generated, and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the elimination of the “inner frame opening detection error” by this command.

  Thus, in the error determination process (S102) of main controller 110, "1" indicating that inner frame 12 is in the open state is set to the fifth bit of first error determination buffer memory 203b and The sixth bit of the memory 203 b is not set to “1” indicating that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state. Therefore, main controller 110 has an error in which the combination of the values of both bits is incorrect, wherein the upper byte is “DDh” and the values of the fifth and sixth bits of the lower byte are both “1”. It does not generate commands.

  Next, referring to FIG. 16, the opening timing of the first large opening 65a (that is, the timing of driving the opening and closing plate of the first large opening 65a by the first large opening solenoid) and the first large opening Correspondence between the signal output from the first specific winning switch 208c for detecting the ball passing through 65a to the MPU 201 and the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 based on the signal output Explain the relationship.

  FIG. 16 (a) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening 65a and the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, and FIG. 16 (b) is the first specific winning switch 208c. FIG. 16C is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the MPU 201 to the MPU 201, and FIG. 16C shows the time of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows a typical change.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the MPU 201 instructs the first large open port solenoid to alternately open and close the first large open port 65a for a predetermined period of time, for a predetermined period after the occurrence of the big hit, The opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a is repeated. At this time, in the pachinko machine 10, after a period of time after the occurrence of the jackpot has passed and a period in which the first large opening 65a alternately repeats opening and closing has passed, it takes a large opening (for example, 2 seconds) It is set as the effective passage period of the ball in the mouth 65a. The effective passage period is a period in which the ball whose passage to the first large opening 65a is detected is treated as a ball that has passed by a normal game. This takes a while for the MPU 201 to command the closing of the first large opening 65a and the first large opening 65a is completely closed, during which time the ball takes the first large opening 65a. It is because it may pass. For this reason, the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a is sufficiently longer than the period until the first large opening 65a is completely closed after the MPU 201 instructs the end of the opening / closing operation. It has become a thing.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (c), during the period other than the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a, the first specified winning switch 208c passes the ball in the first large opening 65a. When the MPU 201 detects an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 generates a “first fraudulent winning error” in the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b at the timing when the rising of the ON signal is detected. Set "1" to indicate. As a result, in the period other than the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a, the error judgment processing (S102) executed when the rising of the on signal from the first specific winning switch 208c is detected An error command is generated in which the byte is "DDh" and the value of the seventh bit of the lower byte is "1", and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the occurrence of the "first incorrect prize error" by this command.

  On the other hand, in the period other than the above timing, the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b is maintained at “0”. When an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is transmitted in such a period, the value of the seventh bit of the lower byte in the command becomes "0".

  The 0th bit of the second specified winning opening 650a and the second error determination buffer memory 203c is also similar to the 7th bit of the first specified winning opening 65a and the first error determination buffer memory 203b. And I omit the explanation.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light from a lamp display device (such as the lighting units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and controls the main controller 110. Based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received more, control such as setting of the fluctuation mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed in the fluctuation time is executed. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 stores a program for executing notification corresponding to the error command whose reception has been confirmed, using the 7-segment display 37 b, a lamp, and a speaker. Although details will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the MPU 221 analyzes the upper byte of the received error command stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the received error command is main control Whether the error command includes in the lower byte information indicating the occurrence status of multiple types of errors generated using the first error determination buffer memory 203 b or the second error determination buffer memory 203 c of the device 110 Determine.

  When it is determined by the MPU 221 that the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors in the lower byte, the MPU 221 Bit (a set of 1st and 2nd bits, or each of 1st and 3rd bytes, 1st and 4th bytes, 3rd and 4th bytes, 5th and 6th bytes) Based on the set of bits), it is determined whether the received error command is an incorrect command.

  The abnormal command here means the command generated by the main control unit 110 due to the influence of wiring abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit in the wiring 302 or noise mixing in the wiring 302 etc. This is a command whose content has been changed in the process of transmission and reception of commands between the device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 32, but this determination is made by using a specific 1-bit value and another specific 1-bit value that constitute the lower byte of the received error command. However, this is performed by confirming whether the combination can not be set by the error determination processing (S102) as described above.

  When it is determined that the received error command is normal, notification based on the received error command is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received error command is abnormal, notification based on the received error command is not performed. As a result, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously notified, and the reliability of the error notification can be enhanced.

  The RAM 223 has a holding ball number counter 223a. The holding ball number counter 223a is, like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203 a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the number holding ball counter 223a.

  Specifically, in the case of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variation effect is added by entering the first entrance ball 64, and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main control unit 110 included in the pending ball number command (ie, pending at the main control unit 110 The stored ball number of the variable effect) is stored in the stored ball number counter 223a (see S1107 in FIG. 30).

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is transmitted along with the reception. If the mode of the variable display in the display device 81 is set, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1207 in FIG. 34). As described above, since the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the holding ball number counter 223 a is used to light the holding lamp 85. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 lights and displays the holding lamp 85 by the same number as the value indicated by the holding ball number counter 223a. As a result, the player can easily grasp the number of holding balls. Further, as described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is changed while being synchronized with the holding counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of the hold lamps 85 to be lit and displayed in synchronization with the value of the hold counter 403a of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of holding balls can be accurately displayed by the holding lamp 85.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e. The first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e are counters for storing the number of abnormal error commands received by the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 It is used to determine that there is a possibility that a wiring abnormality (disconnection, short circuit, etc.) of the wiring 302 to be connected may occur.

  The first wiring abnormality determination counter 223 b is an error command of the upper byte “DDh”, and the value of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is an abnormal combination (that is, a combination of “1, 1”). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and in the combination where the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are incorrect (that is, the combination of "1, 1"). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The third wiring abnormality determination counter 223 d is an error command of the upper byte “DDh”, and in the combination where the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte are not normal (that is, the combination of “1, 1”). It is a counter that is incremented by one when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte "DDh", and the values of those bits are cleared to zero when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  The fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 d is an error command of the upper byte “DEh”, and in the combination (ie, the combination of “1, 1”) in which the values of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte are incorrect. It is a counter that is incremented by 1 when a command is received, and is an error command of the upper byte “DEh”, and the value of those bits is cleared to 0 when a correct combination of error commands is received.

  In all of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e, "0" is set as an initial value in the initial value setting process (S910, see FIG. 22) in the start-up process at the time of power on. Ru.

  Here, an error command in which the combination of specific bits is not normal (simply referred to as an incorrect error command) is noise to the wiring 302 in addition to the wiring abnormality such as the short circuit of the wiring 302 as described above. Is a command that the audio lamp control device 113 may receive due to the mixing.

  Here, since mixing of noise into the wire 302 is irregular as to which part (wire) of the wire 302 is loaded, it is an irregular phenomenon that it affects which bit of the error command. On the other hand, since a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in the wiring 302 is a continuous phenomenon in a part or all of the wiring 302, if an abnormality such as a short circuit occurs in a part of the wiring corresponding to a specific bit. Then, until the wiring abnormality is resolved, certain bits in the error command may continue to be a combination of incorrect values.

  Therefore, in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, one of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e has a value equal to or greater than the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment). In this case, that is, when the combination of the specific 2-bit values is an incorrect error command and the same type is received three consecutive times, it is determined that the wiring abnormality has occurred.

  When the wiring abnormality is judged by the MPU 221, the fact is notified in a mode different from various errors. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Furthermore, the RAM 223 has a bit check execution flag 223f. The bit check execution flag 223 f is a flag for indicating whether abnormality confirmation of the wiring 302 or the various switches 208 is performed, which is performed using an error command transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is.

  The bit check execution flag 223f is turned on in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) performed when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on, and the voice lamp control device 113 generates an error command of the upper byte "DEh" This flag is turned off in the error-time operation execution process (S1109, FIG. 31) described later when the power is received for the first time after power-on.

  Although the details will be described later, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 executes an error determination process (see FIG. 24) and transmits it by an error command of the upper byte “DEh”. As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control unit 110 at this time has no error assignment in the third to seventh bits, and the value of each bit is "0". Is the command to be set.

  Therefore, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives this command, if any one of the third to seventh bits is "1", the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 In other words, there is a possibility that abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit has occurred in the wiring 302. In this case, it can be considered that commands other than the error command are not properly transmitted and received due to the wiring abnormality.

  Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 receives an error command of the upper byte “DEh” for the first time after the power is turned on, that is, the bit check execution flag 223f is on. If the value of the third bit to the seventh bit of the command is “1”, it is determined that “1” indicates that the wiring 302 has an abnormality. It is supposed that the notification is given on the assumption that there is a possibility that In this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state in which the wiring 302 has an abnormality.

  A variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variation effect pending in the main control device 110 is at most 4 It is a counter that counts up to times.

  The RAM 223 additionally shows a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a change start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. Also, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1104 in FIG. 30), and is turned off when the fluctuation display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1202 in FIG. 34).

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 is a device for controlling the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and is a variation display of the third symbol (variation effect), a special effect shown in FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 performs various screen displays such as a screen to be displayed when the first or second large opening 65a 650a opens and closes, a screen to notify the end of the jackpot in 2R or later in the aspect or the special aspect 2 It controls according to the command transmitted from (main controller 110111).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command and other various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory storing compressed data (character information) such as a symbol (a background symbol or a third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 in a decompressed form in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the plurality of decompressed characters It is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data of one frame generated using at least a part of character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 ms). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then start-up processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interruption process, first, read processing of various winning switches such as the start winning switch 208b and the first and second specified winning switches 208c and 208d is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the states of the switches 208 other than the various winning switches are also read, and an error determination process is performed to determine whether an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (S102). That is, based on the states of the various switches 208, it is determined whether or not various errors occur, and an error command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the occurrence of an error based on the determination result. Generate The details of the error determination process (S102) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S104). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 9, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, processing for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and variation processing for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S105), and further, the first ball entry opening The start-up winning process accompanying the winning to 64 is executed (S106). The details of the fluctuation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S107), and the other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S108), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, the variation process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S105). This fluctuation process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (S201). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), since the variable display can not be performed, the present processing ends.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S203: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S203, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) It is judged whether or not is larger than 0 (S204), and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is not 0 (S204: No), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S205), and the data stored in the holding ball storage area is subjected to shift processing (S206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area toward the execution area, and the first pending area → the execution area, the second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S207), and this process is ended as it is. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is 0 (S204: No), a state in which demonstration effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, ie, It is determined whether or not a demo is in progress (S208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is determined to be larger than 0 Determine that the interval is under demonstration.

  Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S208: No), a demo command is set (S209), and this processing is ended, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S208: Yes), This processing ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, the demonstration command is set, as described above, when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration command can be set to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S211), and the present process is ended.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S212). The setting of the stop symbol of the first symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, in the variation start process (S207), it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area by the process of S206. In the case, the jackpot type is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Then, as the stop display of the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit, the stop symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is set, and in the case of the release, the stop symbol corresponding to the release is set.

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S212, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37 In order to make the decision, a decision command is set (S213), and this processing ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the fluctuation start process (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S207). This variation start process (S207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area While making a big hit lottery and small hitting determination, it decides the production pattern (the fluctuation time) of the fluctuation production which is done with the 1st design indicator 37 and the 3rd design indicator 81.

  In the change start process, first, a big hit lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area (S301). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, “7, 307, 582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table becomes the jackpot random number value, and the pachinko machine 10 If the game state of is a high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322," corresponding to the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined that it is a jackpot Do.

  When it is determined as a result of the process of S301 that it is a big hit (S301: Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area And the display mode (stop symbol) at the time of jackpot is set based on that (S302). In this process, the first symbol display device is based on the jackpot type set by the first hit classification counter C2 and the jackpot type table, that is, 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot The stop symbol of 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) and the stop symbol of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S303). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the variation pattern table selected by the jackpot type determined in the process of S302. As described above, the first variation pattern table is selected when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and the second variation pattern table is selected when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is associated is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be started from now.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in the process of S301 (S301: No), it is determined that the game is out, and a display mode (stop symbol) at the time of removal is set (S307). In the process of S307, the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, As a stop type (stop symbol) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front / back outreach, a reach other than back / front out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set such that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. ing.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of out of step is determined (S308). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the variation pattern table selected based on various conditions. Here, if the stop type of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the process of S307 is the reach other than the front-rear outreach or the front-rear outset, the third variation pattern table is selected, and the third symbol display apparatus 81 If the stop type is completely out, the fourth variation pattern table for time saving or the fourth variation pattern table for non-time reduction is selected. The fourth variation pattern table for time reduction is selected when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state (including the probability variation (the high probability state of the third symbol) when the hitting probability of the second symbol is increased) If the game arcade of the machine 10 is other than that, the non-time-shortening fourth variation pattern table is selected. Then, in the selected fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is associated is determined as the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be started from now.

  When the process of S303 or S308 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S303 or S308 is set (S309). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S302 or S307 is set (S310), and the fluctuation start process is ended. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S801 of the main process (FIG. 23). Ru.

  Next, the start winning process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S106). The start winning process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and if there is a starting winning From the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters, the permission judgment process of starting the continuous preview effect in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation effect being held in the main control unit 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S402). And if there is no winning at the first ball entry 64 (S401: No), or if there is a winning at the first ball entering 64, if the number of operation holding balls is not N <4 (S402: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the number of holding balls N <4 (S402: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the step S103 is added to the vacant reserve area of the reserve sphere storage area of the RAM 203. It stores in the first area (S404).

  Next, a pending ball count command including the value N of the pending ball count counter 203a updated by the process of S403 is created and set (S405). The holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S801 of the main process (FIG. 23). The sound lamp control device 113 updates the holding series counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 based on the holding ball number N included in the holding ball number command, and the holding lamps for the number indicated by the holding series counter 223a. Display 85 lit.

  Then, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout and emission control device 311 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S701). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S703).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S704), and if it is turned on (S704: Yes), the process proceeds to S713. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S705). If not stored (S705: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S713 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S706), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S713. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S812 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S713, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S713). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmission of the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S714, S715) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S714, S715) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 714, S 715) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S714, S715), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S714), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S715). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to the process of S711.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S704: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S705: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S707: Yes, while keeping the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the occurrence information of power-off (S708), and then clear the first and second error judgment buffer memories 203b and 203c to 0 (initialization) And the process proceeds to the process of S710 (S709).

  In the process of S710, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S710). Although details will be described later, it is possible to generate an error command of the upper byte “DEh” and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 113 in an error determination process (S711) executed subsequent to the process of S711. The details of the process of S711 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S711, the interrupt is permitted (S712), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S801 to S805 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S808 and S809 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 17), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device The external output process to be sent to is executed (S801).

  Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command, the determination command, and the large open ports 65a and 650a are opened and closed by this external output processing. The notification command A, notification command B, probability command, round number command, ending command A, ending command B, etc. necessary to display various screens on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. . In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S803), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the first large prize of the first variable winning device 65 A large opening opening / closing process is executed to open or close each of the opening 65a and the second large opening 65a of the second variable winning device 650 (S804). That is, the large open port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum open time of the large open port 65a has passed or whether the ball has won a specified number of balls in the large open port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the large open port 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the large open port 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S805). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S806), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S806: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S807) If the predetermined time has already passed (S807: Yes), the process proceeds to S801, and the above-described S801 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S807: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S808, S809).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S808). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S802 (S809).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S801 to S805 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Also, in the process of S806, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S806: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 21 has been executed, so the process at the time of the power-off after S810 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S810), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S811). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S812), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S813), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The processing of S806 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change of the state of the game performed in S801 to S805, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S808 and S809 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S801. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S801. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S801. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, error determination processing (S102, S711) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this error determination process (S102). This error determination process (S102, S711) is a process executed in each process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the start-up process (see FIG. 22) described later, and the state of the various switches 208 Based on the above, the occurrence status of various errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is determined, an error command is generated based on the determination result, and the generated error command is set in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203. Do.

  In the error determination process (S102, S711), first, the radio wave detection process for determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "radio wave detection error" is executed (S501).

  Here, the details of the radio wave detection process (S501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing the radio wave detection process (S501). In the radio wave detection processing, first, it is determined whether or not the radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection device 208 a by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208 a input to the MPU 201. (S520). As described above, the radio wave detection device 208a outputs an ON signal when a radio wave of a predetermined value level is detected, and outputs an OFF signal when no radio wave is detected.

  Therefore, if the rising edge of the ON signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 determines that the radio wave detection device 208a detects a radio wave and generates a “radio wave detection error” (S520) Yes: "1" is set to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (S521). Thereby, information indicating that a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection device 208a, that is, a determination result that a "radio wave detection error" has occurred is stored in the bit. Thereafter, the radio wave detection process (S501) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, if it is not the timing when the rise of the on signal is input from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201 (S520: No), the radio wave detection process (S501) is ended and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). Each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is cleared to 0 at the start of the error determination process (S102) by the process of S512 described later. Therefore, in this case, "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes a winning switch abnormality determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "winning switch abnormal error" (S502).

  Here, the details of the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 (b) is a flowchart showing the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502). In the winning switch abnormality determination processing, first, detection information of the ball at the first entrance (starting opening) 64 for each timer interrupt processing, which is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed Winning detection information) is acquired (S530), and it is determined whether the ON state of the start winning switch 208b is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) based on the detection information (S531) .

  Since the predetermined time is set to a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the ON state of the start winning switch 208b continues for a predetermined time (0.2 s). If it is determined that the switch has been detected (S531: Yes), as described above, there is a possibility that the start winning switch 208b may be broken, or that the switch 208b may be tampered with. Therefore, in this case, the MPU 201 sets "1" to the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and stores the determination result that the above-mentioned "winning switch error" has occurred (S532). Thereafter, the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, if the start winning switch 208b is in the OFF state, or the on time of the start winning switch 208b is less than the predetermined time (0.2 seconds) or exceeds the predetermined time by the MPU 201. When it is determined (S531: No), the winning switch abnormality determination process (S502) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes front frame opening determination processing to determine the occurrence of the above-described "front frame opening error" (S503).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 25C, details of the front frame opening determination process (S503) will be described. FIG. 25C is a flowchart showing the front frame opening determination process (S503). In the front frame opening determination process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the front frame 14 is in the open state by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the front frame opening switch 208 e. It discriminates (S540). As described above, the front frame opening switch 208e outputs the on signal when the front frame 14 is in the open state, and outputs the off signal when the front frame 14 is in the closed state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the front face frame 14 is in the open state (S540: Yes), "1" is set to the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, whereby the front face frame 14 is set to the front face. Information indicating that the frame 14 has been opened, that is, a "front frame open error" has occurred, is stored (S541). At this time, when the front frame 14 is closed, “0” is stored in the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b in which “1” is stored. Thereafter, the front frame opening determination process (S503) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  When it is determined that it is not the timing when the front frame 14 is opened but the timing when the on signal from the front frame opening switch 208e rises by the processing of S540 (S540: No), the processing proceeds to S542. The MPU 201 determines whether or not the fall from the on signal to the off signal is input from the front frame open switch 208 e, and thereby determines whether it is the timing when the front frame 14 is in the closed state. (S542).

  If it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state by the process of S 542 (S 542: Yes), it means that the “front frame open error” has been eliminated, so the fourth error determination buffer memory 203 b Set "1" to the bit (S543). Thus, information indicating that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, that is, that the “front frame open error” has been eliminated, is stored in the bit. At this time, "0" is stored in the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Thereafter, the front frame opening determination process (S503) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Further, in the process of S 542, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the falling edge to OFF of the signal input from the front frame open switch 208 e is not input to the MPU 201 and the front frame 14 is closed. (S542: No), the front frame opening determination process (S503) ends, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, “0” is stored in both the third bit and the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes a front frame open prize determination process that determines the occurrence of the above-mentioned "front frame open win error" (S504).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26 (a), the details of the win determination processing (S504) when the front frame is opened will be described. FIG. 26 (a) is a flowchart showing the winning determination processing (S504) when the front frame is open. In the front frame opening prize determination process (S504), first, the front frame 14 is determined by determining whether the input signal from the front frame opening switch 208e input to the MPU 201 is an on signal or an off signal. Is determined whether it is in the open state (S550).

  If it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the open state by the process of S550 (S550: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S551, and the ball at the first entrance (starting opening) 64 for each timer interrupt process With reference to the detection information (winning detection information), it is determined whether or not the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the start winning switch 208b (S551). If it is determined that the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is detected by the process of S551 (S551: Yes), "1" is set to the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. (S552). Thereby, the determination result that the "front frame opening winning error" has occurred is stored in the bit. Then, the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (that is, is in the closed state) by the process of S550 (S550: No), or it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the open state by the process of S550 ( S550: Yes, if it is determined that the ball passing through the first entrance 64 is not detected in the subsequent S551 processing (S551: No), the front frame opening prize determination processing (S504) is ended as it is Then, the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, "0" is stored in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes an inner frame opening determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "inner frame opening error" (S505).

  Here, the details of the inner frame opening determination process (S505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the inner frame opening determination process (S505). In the inner frame opening determination process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the inner frame 12 is in the open state by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208 f. It discriminates (S560). As described above, the inner frame opening switch 208f outputs the on signal when the inner frame 12 is in the open state, and outputs the off signal when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state (S 560: Yes), "1" is set to the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, whereby the bit is Information indicating that the frame 12 has been opened, that is, an "inner frame opening error" has occurred, is stored (S561). At this time, when the inner frame 12 is closed, “0” is stored in the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b in which “1” is stored. Thereafter, the inner frame opening determination process (S505) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  When it is determined that it is not the timing at which the on-frame signal from the inner frame opening switch 208f rises but the timing at which the inner frame 12 is opened (S560: No), the process proceeds to S562. The MPU 201 determines whether or not the falling from the on signal to the off signal is input from the inner frame opening switch 208f, and thereby determines whether it is the timing when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state. (S562).

  If it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state by the process of S 562 (S 562: Yes), it means that the “inner frame open error” has been eliminated, so the sixth error detection buffer memory 203 b Set "1" to the bit (S563). Thereby, information indicating that the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, that is, that the "inner frame opening error" has been eliminated is stored in the bit. At this time, “0” is stored in the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b. Thereafter, the inner frame opening determination process (S505) is ended, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102).

  Further, in the process of S 562, when it is determined that the falling edge of the signal input from the inner frame opening switch 208 f is not input to the MPU 201 and it is not the timing when the inner frame 12 is closed. (S562: No), the inner frame opening determination process (S505) ends, and the process returns to the error determination process (S102). In this case, "0" is stored in both the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes an illegal prize determination process of determining the occurrence of the above-mentioned "incorrect prize error" (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), the details of the incorrect prize determination process (S506) will be described. FIG. 27 (a) is a flowchart showing the unfair prize determination process (S506). In the incorrect prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred by the processes of S560 to S562, and the "second incorrect prize error" occurs by the processes of S563 to S565. It is determined whether the

  First, referring to ball detection information (winning detection information) at the first large opening 65a for each timer interrupt processing, which is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed, It is determined whether or not a ball passing through the one large opening port 65a is detected (S560).

  If it is determined that the ball passing through the first large opening 65a is detected in the process of S560 (S560: Yes), whether or not it is an effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a described above (S561). If it is determined that it is not an effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a (S561: No), "1" is set to the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and "first incorrect prize error" The determination result that "is generated" is stored (S562), and the process proceeds to the processing of S563.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing through the first large opening 65a is not detected by the process of S560 (S560: No), the processes of S561 and S562 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S563. Do. When it is determined in the process of S561 that it is the effective passage period of the ball in the first large opening 65a (S561: Yes), the process of S562 is skipped to shift to the process of S563. In these cases, "0" is stored as the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b.

  In the processing of S563, the detection information (winning detection information) of the ball in the second large opening 650a for each timer interrupt processing is stored each time the winning switch reading processing (S101) of the timer interrupt processing is performed. It is determined whether a ball passing through the second large opening port 650a is detected.

  If it is determined that the ball passing through the second large opening port 650a is detected in the process of S563 (S563: Yes), it is determined whether it is an effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening port 650a. (S564). If it is determined that the effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening port 650a is not (S564: No), "0" is set to the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and the "second fraudulent prize error" The determination result that "is generated" is stored (S565). Then, the incorrect winning determination process (S506) is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passing through the second large opening 650a is not detected in the process of S563 (S563: No), the respective processes of S564 and S565 are skipped, and the unfair prize judgment process as it is The (S506) ends. Further, if it is determined in the process of S564 that it is the effective passage period of the ball in the second large opening 650a (S564: Yes), the process of S565 is skipped and the illegal prize determination process (S506) is ended. Do. In these cases, "0" is stored as the value of the 0th bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes vibration detection processing to determine the occurrence of the “vibration detection error” and the “vibration stop error” described above (S507).

  Here, the details of the vibration detection process (S507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (b) is a flowchart showing the vibration detection process (S507). In the vibration detection process (S507), first, the MPU 201 determines whether vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 by determining whether or not the rising of the on signal is input from the vibration sensor 208g (S570). ). As described above, the vibration sensor 208g outputs an on signal when a vibration at a set value level is detected, and outputs an off signal when the detected vibration level becomes less than the set value level.

  If it is determined in the process of S570 that the rise of the on signal is input from the vibration sensor 208g (S570: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the vibration detection counter (not shown) (S571), and the value after addition It is determined whether the value is for stopping the game (S572). The vibration detection counter is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of vibrations given by the pachinko machine 10, and is initialized when the power is turned on.

  If it is determined that the value of the vibration detection counter is a value for stopping the game, the process proceeds to S 573, and a command corresponding to “vibration stop error” is read from the predetermined area of the ROM 202, and the command Are set in the command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S573), and the process returns to the error determination process (S102, S711).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S572 that the value of the vibration detection counter is less than the value for stopping the game (S572: No), the process proceeds to S574 and the second error determination buffer memory 203c "1" is set to the 0th bit, thereby storing the determination result that "vibration detection error" is generated in the bit (S574), and the vibration detection processing (S507) is ended. At this time, "0" is stored in the first bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c that stores the determination result that the "vibration detection error" has been cancelled.

  Return to S570 and continue the explanation. When it is determined that the rising of the on signal is not input from the vibration sensor 208g by the process of S570 (S570: No), it is determined whether or not the falling from the on signal to the off signal is input (S570: S575). If it is determined that the falling to the off signal is input (575: Yes), the MPU 201 sets “1” to the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and performs the error determination process (S102, Return to S711).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fall to the off signal is not input (575: No), the process returns to the error determination process (S102, S711) as it is. In this case, “0” is stored in both the first bit and the second bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203 c.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. After the vibration detection process 507, the MPU 201 executes each error detection process. That is, when information is not stored in the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c and other errors occur, it is detected, and an error command corresponding to the occurred error is transmitted to the ring for command transmission of the RAM 203. It sets to a buffer (not shown) (S508).

  Next, it is determined whether the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S509).

  As described above, since the bit check flag 203d is turned on in the step (S710) immediately before the error determination process (S711) executed in the startup process, the first error determination process (S711) after the power is turned on. Then, it is determined that the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on (S509: Yes). In this case, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned off (S515), and the process proceeds to S513.

  In the process of S513, an error command is generated based on the value stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, and is set in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203. At this time, a command in which the values of the upper byte "DDh" and the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are all set to "0" is generated.

  Next, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (S514), and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the error determination process (S711) executed in the startup process activated at the time of power on, the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, regardless of the result of the processes in S506 and S507. , And the upper byte "DEh" and the third to seventh bits of the lower byte have an error command of "0".

  It returns to the process of S509 and continues description. If it is determined that the bit check execution flag 203d is turned off (that is, the error determination process is one of timer interrupt processes), the process proceeds to the process of S510 (S509: No). In the process of S510, it is determined whether or not information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated exists in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (in the present embodiment, “1” is set in any of the bits). It is determined whether or not it is stored (S510).

  When it is determined by the process of S510 that there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b ("1" is stored in any of the bits. (If it exists) (S510: Yes), the process proceeds to S511, and an error command is generated based on the value stored in each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and the command transmission ring of the RAM 203 is generated. It sets to a buffer (S511), and it transfers to the process of S512. The error command generated at this time is composed of two bytes of the upper byte, the value “DDh” unique to the error command, the lower byte (lower 8 bits), and the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S510 that there is no information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (“0” is stored in all bits) When it exists (S510: No), the process of S511 is skipped, and it transfers to the process of S512. In this case, an error command of the upper byte "DDh" is not generated by the error determination process (S102) being executed.

  In the process of S512, it is determined whether or not there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c (in the present embodiment, “1” is included in any of the bits). Determine whether or not it is stored. Here, when it is determined that there is information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c ("1" in any of the 0th bit to the 3rd bit). (When S512 is stored) (S512: Yes), the process proceeds to S513, and based on the value stored in each bit of the second error determination buffer memory 203c, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" Are set in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203 (S513), and the process proceeds to S514. The error command generated at this time is 2 bytes of the upper byte, the value “DEh” unique to the error command, the lower byte (lower 8 bits), and the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c. Configured

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no information indicating that an error has occurred or has been eliminated in any of the bits of the second error determination buffer memory 203c by the process of S512 ("0" is stored in all bits) If it is (S512: No), the process of S513 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S514. In this case, an error command of the upper byte "DEh" is not generated by the error determination process (S102) being executed.

  After shifting to the process of S514, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (S514), and the process is ended.

  As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DDh" and the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment executing the error determination process (S102) Since information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of different errors is included, it is possible to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors only by transmitting one error command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  Further, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment reflects the occurrence status of different types of errors in each bit of the lower byte at the timing at which an error occurs or disappears based on the detection results by the various switches 208. The generated error command is generated and stored in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203.

  Therefore, the error command in the command transmission ring buffer is occupied, as compared with the case where the error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of different types of errors is sequentially generated and transmitted regardless of the change in the occurrence status of the error. The proportion can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 23) can be further reduced, and the capacity occupied by the error command in the ring buffer for command transmission (not shown) can be compressed more efficiently. can do. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more preferably.

  Next, each control process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S901). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1018 (see FIG. 29) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current start-up process. It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S902). As described later with reference to FIG. 29, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1015 in FIG. 29), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1018. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1018 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S902: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1018 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S903).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written by the process of S906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S903: Yes), the process proceeds to S904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S903: No), the process proceeds to S908.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S903) is judged to be data destruction in the RAM 223 (S903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S904. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1018 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S903: No), and the process proceeds to S908.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S902: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure, and during the execution of the power-off process of S1018, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power-off process is being executed. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S904, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S904). As a check method, first, “0F1h” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0F1h”, and if “0F1h”, it is determined that it is normal. The write and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0F1h”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S906). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S908, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S908). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1018 is performed (see S1017 in FIG. 29). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1018 is executed, the process of S908 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S 908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S 909), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S 910). In the process of S910, "0" is set as the initial value of each of the first to fourth wiring abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e.

  Next, interrupt permission is set (S 911), and the process shifts to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S908 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S908 through S906 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S 908: No), S 909, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S 910, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S 910). Then (S911), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S909 is that, when the process of S908 is reached through the processes of S904 to S906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S904. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the processing of S1001 has been executed last time (S1001), and 1 ms or more has elapsed. If not (S1001: No), the process proceeds to S1013 without performing the process of S1002 to S1012. S1002 to S1012 are processes related to display and sound setting (that is, setting of effects) in step S1001 to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display processing of S1013 and the command determination processing of S1014 in a short cycle, while there is no Since the process of S1014 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S1013 is executed in a short cycle. Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1001 (S1001: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1003 to S1014 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1002) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1009 described later (S1003), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1004). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1005 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1005, the customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1006). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the pending number display updating process, a process of lighting the pending lamp 85 in accordance with the value of the pending ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1007). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. For example, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces an expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, it may be a decision button for changing to an effect that can be possessed or selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. In addition, when the frame button 22 is not arrange | positioned, the process of S1007 is abbreviate | omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is finished, next, the lamp editing process is executed (S1009), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1010). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1010, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1011), and then the counter update process is performed (S1012), and the process shifts to the process of S1013. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1009 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1010 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the counter updating process, the various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated.

  In the process of S1013, in order to display the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command The variable display process, which is a process to be generated and set to transmit the generated command to the display control apparatus 114, is executed (S1013). Details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1014). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1014 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1015 (S1015: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are both turned on (S1017), and the power-off process is executed (S1018). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1019), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1015 (S1015: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1016) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1016: No), the process returns to S1001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1016: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a command determination process (S1014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1014). This command determination process (S1014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S1101). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1101: Yes), the variation pattern type (variation time) is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1102), and the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern in a variation display process (see FIG. 34) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. To be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1101: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1103). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1103: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1104), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 233 (S1105). Then, the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1103: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1106). Then, when it is determined that the holding ball number command is received (S1106: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (that is, held by the main control device 110) The number of balls held for variation effect) is extracted, and this is stored in the number of balls held counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1107). Then, the command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S2008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a can be corrected and adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

  As a result of the process of S1106, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has not been received (S1106: No), it is then determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1108). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S1108: Yes), an error operation execution process is executed, a process corresponding to the received error command is performed (S1109), and the process returns to the main process. The details of the error operation execution process (S1109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As a result of the process of S1108, when it is determined that the error command has not been received (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S1111), shift to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  The confirmation command received from main controller 110 is set as a display confirmation command by the process of S 1111 and is transmitted to display control device 114. In the display control device 114, when the display confirmation command is received, the fluctuation effect of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed and displayed. Further, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1111 and transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a demo screen by receiving the display demo command.

  In addition, when a command not supported by the voice lamp control device 113 has been received, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display an error screen or execute a variation effect in a special mode that is not normally executed. A command to instruct the display of the error screen or the execution of the fluctuation effect according to the special mode is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, an error operation execution process (S1019) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this error operation execution process (S1019). This error operation execution process (S1019) is executed in the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, received from the main control device 110 Perform processing corresponding to the specified error command.

  In this error operation execution process (S1109), first, it is determined whether the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DDh", "DEh", or any other value (S1121). ).

  If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DDh" (S1121: "DDh"), the first error operation execution process (S1122) is executed.

  Here, the details of the first error operation execution process (S1122) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the first error operation execution process (S1122). In the first error operation execution process (S1122), a process corresponding to the error command of the upper byte "DDh" received by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the first error operation execution process, it is first determined whether or not the combination of the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are improper (S1131). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DDh", the case where the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This is inconsistent with the third bit, which indicates that the front frame 14 is in the open state, and that the fourth bit indicates that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, and is executed by the main control unit 110. This is because the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102.

  If it is determined by the process of S1131 that the combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is abnormal (S1131: Yes), the process proceeds to S1132. In the process of S1132, 1 is added to the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b which is a counter corresponding to the third bit and the fourth bit (S1132), and the values of the second and third wiring abnormality counters 223c, 223d Is cleared (S1133), and the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b after addition is compared with the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment) by the process of S1134 (S1134).

  If the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is less than the determination threshold "3" (S1134: No) as a result of comparison by the process of S1134 (S1134: No), the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and the process Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is a value equal to or greater than “3” of the determination threshold as a result of comparison by the processing of S1134 (S1134: Yes), Notification is performed on the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 as there may be an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1135), and the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) End the process.

  Returning to the process of S1131, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is normal by the process of S1131 (S1131: No), the process proceeds to S1136 and the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S1136). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DDh", the case where the values of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This indicates that the first frame is open when the front frame 14 is open, and the first frame bit 14 is closed when the front frame 14 is closed. This is because it is a contradictory one, which is a combination that can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 executed by the main controller 110.

  If it is determined by the process of S1136 that the combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1136: Yes), the process proceeds to S1137. Then, 1 is added to the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c which is a counter corresponding to the first bit and the fourth bit (S1137), and the values of the first and third wiring abnormality counters 223b and 223d are cleared. (S1138), the process proceeds to S1134.

  In the process of S1134, the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c after the addition is compared with the determination threshold ("3" in this embodiment) as described above (S1134). As a result of comparison, if it is determined that the value of the second wiring abnormality determination counter 223c is a value less than "3" of the determination threshold (S1134: No), the process is returned to the operation at error operation (S1109) and processed. Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is determined to be the value of “3” or more of the determination threshold value by the process of S1134 (S1134: Yes), the possibility of the wiring abnormality occurring in the wiring 302 The notification is executed on the assumption that there is an error (S1135), and the process returns to the operation execution at error processing (S1109) and ends the processing.

  It returns to the process of S1136 and continues explanation. If it is determined by the process of S1136 that the combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is normal (S1136: No), the process proceeds to S1139, and the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S1139). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the case where the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte are both “1” is an incorrect combination. This is inconsistent with the fifth bit, which indicates that the inner frame 12 has been opened, and the sixth bit, which indicates that the inner frame 12 has been closed. This is because the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 to be executed.

  If it is determined by the process of S1139 that the combination of the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1139: Yes), the process proceeds to S1140. Then, 1 is added to the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d which is a counter corresponding to the fifth bit and the sixth bit (S1140), and the values of the first and second wiring abnormality counters 223b and 223c are cleared. (S1141), the process proceeds to S1134.

  In the process of S1134, as described above, the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d after addition is compared with the determination threshold value ("3" in this embodiment) (S1134). As a result of comparison, if it is determined that the value of the third wiring abnormality determination counter 223d is a value less than “3” of the determination threshold (S1134: No), the process is returned to the operation at error operation (S1109) and processed. Finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1134 that the value of the first wiring abnormality determination counter 223b is a value equal to or greater than "3" of the determination threshold (S1134: Yes), the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and Notification is performed on the wire 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 as an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1135), and the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process. Do.

  Returning to the process of S1139, the description will be continued. If it is determined by the process of S1139 that the combination of the value of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte is normal (S1139: No), the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 at this time receives a normal command. In the lower byte of the error command, the notification corresponding to the bit for which "1" is set is executed (S1142). Next, the first to third wiring abnormality counters 223b to 223d are all cleared to 0 (S1143), and the process returns to the error operation execution processing (S1109) to end the processing.

  As described above, in the first error operation execution process (S1122), the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte of the upper byte "DDh" error command by each process of S1131, S1136, and S1139 is In the error determination process (S102) executed by the main control unit 110, it is determined whether or not the combination is an improper combination that can not be set. Then, when it is determined that any two bits are in an incorrect combination, the error command is included in the command as an abnormal command affected by wiring abnormality or noise. Notification is not performed based on the information indicating the occurrence status of the error (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte).

  On the other hand, if it is determined through the processing of S1131, S1136, and S1139 that all combinations of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte are normal combinations (S1131: No, S1136: No, S1139 No: The error command is notified as a normal command based on information indicating an error occurrence status included in the command (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte). Therefore, the reliability of error notification can be increased.

  Also, if it is determined that the specific 2 bits of the lower byte are an incorrect combination three consecutive times in any one of S1131, S1136, and S1139, that is, three consecutive same two bits Only when an error command whose value is incorrect is received, the values of the first to third wiring abnormality judgment counters 223b to 223d become “3” or more, which is the judgment threshold value, and the wiring of S1135 is performed. It is informed that there is a high possibility of the wiring abnormality occurring at 302. While a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in a part of the wiring 302 is a phenomenon that continues until it is eliminated, while noise contamination in the wiring 302 affects which part (wire) of the wiring 302 Since this is an irregular phenomenon, this makes it possible to identify whether or not the cause of the error command being abnormal is noise or wiring abnormality, and the wiring abnormality that needs to be notified Only when the possibility of occurrence is high, notification to that effect can be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DEh" (S1121: "DEh"), the second error operation execution process (S1123) is executed.

  Here, the details of the second error operation execution process (S1123) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this second error operation execution process (S1123). In the second error operation execution process (S1123), a process corresponding to the error command of the upper byte "DEh" received by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  In the second error operation execution process, first, it is determined whether the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on (S1151). Here, when it is determined that the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on (S1151: Yes), the bit check execution flag 223f is turned off (S1152), and the upper rank generated in the start processing of the main control device 110 In the lower byte of the error command of the byte "DEh", whether or not the wiring 302 is abnormal is determined by determining whether "0" is set in all the third to seventh bits. The determination is made (S1153). As described above, the error command of the upper byte "DEh" is generated by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 as a command in which all the values of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte are fixed to "0". For this reason, if “1” is set to any of the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte according to the determination in S1153 (S1153: Yes), a wiring abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wiring 302. There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case (S1153: Yes), notification about wiring abnormality is executed (S1154). After that, the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that "0" is set to all the third to seventh bits in the process of S1153 (S1153: No), the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109). End the process.

  It returns to the process of S1151 and continues description. If it is determined by the process of S1151 that the bit check execution flag 223f is turned off (S1151: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1155, and the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the lower byte It is determined whether the value of the second bit is an incorrect combination (S1155). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh", the case where the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte are both "1" is an incorrect combination. This indicates that the level (intensity) of the vibration detected by the vibration sensor 208g is a notification level at the first bit, while the level of the vibration detected by the vibration sensor 208g at the second bit This is because the (intensity) is contradictory, indicating that the level does not reach the notification level, and the combination is impossible in the normal command generated by the error determination processing S102 executed by the main control device 110.

  If it is determined by the process of S1155 that the combination of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is not normal (S1155: Yes), the process proceeds to S1156. In the processing of S1156, 1 is added to the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e which is a counter corresponding to the first bit and the second bit (S1156), and the processing of S1157 continues the fourth wiring abnormality after the addition. The value of the determination counter 223f is compared with the determination threshold ("3" in the present embodiment) (S1157).

  As a result of comparison by the processing of S1157, if the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e is a value smaller than "3" of the determination threshold (S1157: No), the process returns to the operation execution processing at error (S1109) and processing Finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 e is a value equal to or greater than “3” of the determination threshold value as a result of comparison by the process of S1157 (S1157: Yes), with the input / output port 205 of main controller 110 In the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113, notification is performed on the assumption that there may be an abnormality such as a short circuit (S1154), and the error operation execution process (S1109) Return and end the process.

  It returns to the process of S1155 and continues explanation. If it is determined by the processing of S1155 that the combination of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is normal (S1155: No), the value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223e is cleared to 0 (S1158) Assuming that a normal command has been received, the processing corresponding to the bit in which “1” is set in the lower byte of the error command is executed (S1159). Thereby, notification of an error and termination of the notification can be performed. Then, the process returns to the error operation execution process (S1109) and ends the process.

  As described above, in the second error operation execution process (S1123), the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte of the upper byte “DEh” error command is transmitted to main controller 110 by the process of S1155. In the error determination process (S102) to be executed, it is determined whether or not the combination is an improper combination that can not be set. Then, if it is determined that the combination is incorrect, it is determined that the error command is an abnormal command affected by wiring abnormality or noise, and the occurrence status of the error included in the command is Notification is not performed based on the indicated information (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte).

  On the other hand, when the combination of the specific 2-bit values included in the lower byte is determined to be normal by the process of S1155 (S1155: No), the error command including the 2 bits is a normal command. On the basis of the information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the command (that is, the value of each bit of the lower byte), notification is performed. Therefore, the reliability of error notification can be increased.

  Also, if it is determined that the specific 2 bits of the low-order byte is an incorrect combination three consecutive times by the process of S1155, that is, the same two-bit value is an incorrect error command three consecutive times. The value of the fourth wiring abnormality determination counter 223 e becomes “3” or more, which is the determination threshold value, only when the signal is received, and there is a high possibility that the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality due to the processing of S1154. You will be informed. In this case, as described above, it is specified that the cause of the error command becoming abnormal is more likely to be the continuous phenomenon wiring abnormality than the noise which is the irregular phenomenon. It is for.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is not even (S1121: Other), the process according to the type of the received error command is executed (S1124). That is, in a mode corresponding to the command, lighting of each lamp, display by the 7-segment display 37b, or audio output from the speaker is performed, and an error generated is notified. The error command at this time corresponds to an error of 1 for a 1-byte command consisting of 2 bytes. After execution of the process of S1124, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variation display process (S1013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1013). This fluctuation display process (S1013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81. In order to make it possible, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control unit 110, and the generated display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command are generated. Is set to transmit to the indication control device 114.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1201). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S1201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from main controller 110, this is the case. The variable display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1202), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S1102 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). The variation pattern type (variation time) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1105 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S1203).

  Then, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the value of the counter provided in the RAM 223 and the variation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S1203 (S1204). Here, the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 by the fluctuation pattern command is defined only for the fluctuation time, but the various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S1204 One of the variation patterns is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S 1204, next, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. It sets to transmit to (S1205). Also, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S1203 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1206).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop symbol that matches the stop type, and when displaying the change effect started by the display change pattern command, the display Display the selected stop symbol.

  Then, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball is performed). (S1207) The variation display process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into main processing repeatedly executed after power on, command interrupt processing executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 236. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1301). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed type character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read out, the read out character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the decompressed character information The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization.

  When the initial setting process is completed, next, interrupt permission is set (S1302), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Then, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1302, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1401), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 36 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. And the display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. The V interruption signal is a signal which is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 236 completes the drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image at the stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), first, a command determination process (S1501) is executed. In the command determination process (S1501), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and a process according to the command is executed. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the command determination process (S1501) ends, next, the display setting process (S1502) is executed. In the display setting process (S1502), one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of the screen to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1501) etc. Concretely identify the contents of the image.

  After the display setting process (S1502) is executed, task processing is then executed (S1503). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1502), the characters (sprites, displayed objects) constituting the image. While specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, the drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. Thereby, the image controller 236 executes the drawing process of the image according to the information and also causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the image drawn according to the information received 1 V earlier, together with the drive signal Control for transmitting image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  After that, after performing other necessary processing, for example, processing of updating various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S1501) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1601), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S1601: No), the command determination process is ended. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1601: Yes), the type of the command is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S1603).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display initialization command among the unprocessed commands (S1604), and if there is a display initialization command (S1604: Yes), initialization command processing is executed. Then (S1605), the process returns to the process of S1601.

  If it is determined in the process of S1604 that there is no initialization command for display (S1604: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation command for display among the unprocessed commands (S1606), and display is performed. If there is a confirmation command for use (S1606: Yes), a confirmation command process is executed (S1607), and the process returns to the process of S1601. In the finalization command processing, the third symbol display device 81 is set to display the finalization display effect for causing the finalization of the fluctuation effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1606 that there is no display table determination command (S1606: No), it is then determined whether there is a display demo command (S1608), and if there is a display demo command (S1608: Yes) The demo command process is executed (S1609), and the process returns to the process of S1601. In the demonstration command processing, setting is made to display a demonstration screen on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1608 that there is no display demo command (S1608: No), it is then determined whether there is a display variation pattern command (S1610), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S1610) S1610: Yes) The variation pattern command process is executed (S1611), and the process returns to S1601. In the variation pattern command processing, a specific variation selected by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation mode indicated by the display variation pattern command, that is, the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the main controller 110. According to the embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is set to execute the fluctuation effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S1610 that there is no display variation pattern command (S1610: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command (S1612), and if there is a display stop type command (S1612: Yes) A stop type command process is executed (S1613), and the process returns to S1601. In the stop type command processing, in the finalized display of the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, setting is performed so that the final display is performed with the stop type indicated by the display stop type command.

  If it is determined in the process of S1612 that there is no display type command for suspension (S1612: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S1622), and the process returns to S1601.

  In the process of S1601 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1601: Yes ), The processing of S1602 to S1622 is executed again. Then, the processes of S1601 to S1622 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S1601 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the error command based on the values of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c generated by the error determination process (S102) Since information on the occurrence status of a plurality of different types of errors is included, the voice lamp control device 113 can be notified of the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors only by transmitting one error command. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  Further, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment reflects the occurrence status of different types of errors in each bit of the lower byte at the timing at which an error occurs or disappears based on the detection results by the various switches 208. The generated error command is generated and stored in the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203.

  Therefore, the ring for command transmission is compared with the case where the error command including the information indicating the occurrence status of different types of errors is periodically generated and transmitted regardless of the change in the occurrence status of the error. It is possible to reduce the proportion of error commands in the buffer. Therefore, the processing load in the external output processing (S801) of the main processing (see FIG. 23) can be further reduced, and the capacity occupied by the error command in the ring buffer for command transmission (not shown) can be compressed more efficiently. can do. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be performed more preferably.

  In addition, in the error determination processing (S102), the determination result is stored in each bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b, and various errors including error occurrence information in the error command of the upper byte "DDh" are the present embodiment. The configuration with high probability that is adopted also in the model whose configuration is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 (ie, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64 This is an error related to the mouth (first specified winning opening) 65a), and is a highly probable error that is required to be notified regardless of the game content and game playability of the model. Therefore, even with different types of pachinko machines, it is possible to create a program etc. by using the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh", and thus notification of the occurrence of multiple types of errors with one error command. Making it easy to create a pachinko machine.

  Main controller 110 performs an error determination process (S102, S711) so that the value (state) of at least two specific bits constituting the lower byte of the error command does not become a predetermined incorrect combination. Generate commands and also. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the value of a specific bit constituting the lower byte of the error command is main control by the first and second error operation execution processing (S1122, S1123). It is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormal combination is not generated by the device 110 (S1131, S1136, S1139, S1155), and if it is a predetermined abnormal combination, notification based on the error command Make a non-execution. As a result, based on an error command that is in an abnormal state due to noise mixing or wiring abnormality, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously reported, and the reliability of the error notification can be improved. .

  The error command may become an abnormal command due to the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 and the mixing of noise into the wiring 302 and the like. However, while it is an irregular phenomenon that mixing of noise into the wiring 302 or the like affects which part (line) of the wiring 302, a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit in a part of the wiring 302 is a wiring. Since this phenomenon is continued until it is eliminated by the exchange of 302 or the like, the bit corresponding to the line (a part of the interconnection 302) where a short circuit or the like has occurred until the wiring abnormality is eliminated is Continues to be incorrect.

  Therefore, as described above, the audio lamp control device 113 is an error command including two bits in the lower byte of the error command which is an incorrect combination value, and the two incorrect bits are the same. When the signal is received three times in a row, the process of S1135 notifies that there is a possibility that a wiring abnormality such as a short circuit or a disconnection may occur in a part of the wiring 302. Therefore, the notification to that effect can be performed only when there is a high possibility that the wiring abnormality has occurred. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Further, when the power is turned on, the main control apparatus 110 executes an error determination process (S711) and transmits it by an error command of the upper byte "DEh". The error command “DEh” is generated by the main control unit 110 as a command in which no error is assigned to the third bit to the seventh bit and the value of each bit is set to “0”. It is.

  Therefore, in the audio lamp control device 113, since the bit check execution flag 223f is turned on, any value of the third bit to the seventh bit becomes "1" when receiving at the time of power on. Determine if it is. At this time, when it is determined that one of the values is “1”, an abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wire 302 between the main control unit 110 and the audio lamp control unit 113. There is a possibility. Therefore, in this case, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in a part of the wiring 302. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where an abnormality occurs in the wiring 302 and the command can not be transmitted / received accurately.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the occurrence of various errors is input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 by the error determination process (S102) periodically executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Based on the signal, each judgment is made periodically, and only if it is judged that the occurrence status of the error has changed (that is, an error has occurred or has been eliminated) by the periodic judgment. An error command, which is composed of bytes and in which information indicating the error occurrence status is set one by one in each bit of the lower byte, is generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the main processing.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is wired when an error command in which the value of a specific two bits in the lower byte is an incorrect combination is received a predetermined number of times consecutively It is determined that there is a possibility that the wiring abnormality at 302 has occurred, and that effect is notified.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, based on the signals input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201 by the error determination process (S102) periodically executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. When an error occurrence is determined, an error command is formed of 2 bytes and information indicating the error occurrence status is set in each bit of the lower byte one by one, and the error determination process ( It is generated each time S102) and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the main processing.

  At this time, while an error occurs, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 repeatedly generates and transmits an error command in which information indicating the error is set.

  Also in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, processing for determining the occurrence of wiring abnormality is performed as in the first embodiment, but the difference is as follows. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment receives an error command in which the value of a specific two bits in the lower byte is an incorrect combination, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the type of the two incorrect bits. No, it counts the number of times an error command including 2 incorrect bits is received, and the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality if the count value becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value (decision threshold) within a predetermined time (monitoring time). It is determined that there is a possibility that a problem has occurred, and that effect is notified.

  For this reason, in the second embodiment, even if no error occurs and there is no change in the occurrence status of the error, the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command and does wiring abnormality occur? Since the determination is made, the notification can be made promptly after the occurrence of the wiring abnormality as compared with the first embodiment in which transmission and reception of the error command is performed only when there is a change in the occurrence condition of the error. The reliability can be further enhanced.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration in that a bit check execution flag 203d which is included in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment; The bit check execution flag 223f which has been stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has become unnecessary, and the first to fourth wires which have been stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. In addition to providing the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b of 1 in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the abnormality determination counters 223b to 223e, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and timer allocation Error determination processing (S102), which is one of the loading processing (see FIG. 17) Among the main processes (see FIG. 29) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the partial process included in each of the error operation execution process (S1109) which is one process of the command determination process (S1014) This differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110, various processes executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control apparatus 111, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and a display control apparatus The other processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the point that the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration is that the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with one wiring abnormality determination counter 323b. That is the point. In the following, such differences are mainly described. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has one wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b. The wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a counter for storing the number of abnormal error commands received by the voice lamp control device 113, and the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b during a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms). If the value becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, “10”), the abnormal error command for the predetermined value is not due to the mixing of noise, and the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 (for example, , And is used to notify that there is a possibility that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred.

  The wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial value setting process (S 910, see FIG. 28) in the start-up process performed when the power of the audio lamp control device 113 is turned on. If it is determined that the error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" received by the control device 113 contains two incorrect bits in the lower byte, one is added. Here, the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45. However, in the present embodiment, the occurrence status of an error (error occurrence or elimination at each timing whether or not there is a change in the occurrence status of the error The main control unit 110 sequentially transmits information indicating that the main control unit 110 is in an active state. Therefore, if the lower byte of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 contains an incorrect bit due to a single cause such as noise mixing in the wiring 302 etc., the error command is a single one. Because of this, the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is added singly. On the other hand, if the low byte of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 contains an incorrect bit due to the continuous cause of the wiring abnormality (short circuit, disconnection, etc.) of the wire 302, the voice lamp control device 113. Since the low order byte repeatedly receives an error command including an abnormal 2 bits, the value of the line abnormality determination counter 323b is repeatedly added while the line abnormality continues.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 counts the time by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) when the wiring abnormality determination counter 223 b adds 1 to the state of the initial value (for example, “0”). To start. Then, when the value of the counter 223b is equal to the determination threshold (for example, 10) until a predetermined time (for example, 50 ms) elapses after 1 is first added to the value of the counter 223b, the MPU 221 The error command received so far is due to a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302, etc. (It is highly likely that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is the cause, and it is unlikely that the noise is the cause) It is determined that

  Then, the occurrence of the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is notified in a mode different from various errors. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 45.

  First, with reference to FIG. 39, an error determination process (S102) included in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MP 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this error determination process (S102).

  The error determination process (S102) is a process executed in each process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) and the start-up process (see FIG. 22) as described above in the first embodiment. Based on the state of the various switches 208, the occurrence status of various errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 are respectively determined, and an error command is generated based on the determination result, and the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 203 is provided. Set the generated error command to.

  The error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the MPU 201 performs first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c in the processes of S501 to S507. It is the timing to set up the bit. As described above, the MPU 201 according to the first embodiment generates or cancels one of the bits of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c at the timing when the error occurrence state changes. “1” is set according to the error (see FIGS. 11 to 16), and “0” is set at other timings.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, while the MPU 201 generates an error, the MPU 201 generates each bit of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c according to the generated error. Set repeatedly.

  Further, in the error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment is the error determination process of the first embodiment in the error determination process (S102) of the second embodiment. It is a point that each processing of S509, S510, S512, and S515 included in (S102) is not executed. As described above, in the first embodiment, each value of the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c indicates that the occurrence status of an error has changed (that is, one of "1" Is a stored value), and only when the bit check execution flag 203d is turned on, an error command including a plurality of pieces of information indicating an error occurrence status is generated.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the error determination process (S102) performed every 2 ms, and the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are processed. From each value, an upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" error command is generated. Then, as in the first embodiment, this command is sequentially notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S801) performed in the main processing.

  Therefore, as in the first embodiment, an error command is generated at the time of power on and the bit check (see FIG. 33) by the voice lamp control device 113 is not performed in the second embodiment. By the error command continuously transmitted by the control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can immediately monitor the occurrence of wiring abnormality after the power is turned on.

  In the error determination process (S102), first, the radio wave detection process is executed to determine whether a "radio wave detection error" has occurred (S501, see FIG. 25A).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the correspondence between the signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201 and the value of the zeroth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 40 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the radio wave detection device 208a to the MPU 201. FIG. 40 (b) is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows a temporal change of the value of the 0th bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the radio wave detection device 208a does not detect the radio wave irradiated to the pachinko machine 10, and the off signal is sent to the MPU 201. When outputting, the MPU 201 sets "1" indicating that the "radio wave detection error" has occurred to the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time an error determination process is performed every 2 m. (S520: Yes, S521).

  On the other hand, when the radio wave detection device 208a does not detect the radio wave irradiated to the pachinko machine 10 and outputs the OFF signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 sets the 0th bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. “0” indicating that “radio wave detection error” has not occurred is maintained (S520: No).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, a winning switch abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not a "winning switch error" has occurred (S502, see FIG. 25 (b)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the correspondence between the signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201 and the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, and FIG. 43 (b) is a first error judgment set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows temporal change of the value of the 2nd bit of buffer memory 203b.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when an off signal is input from the start winning switch 208b to the MPU 201, or a ball is detected by the starting win switch 208b. If the output period of the ON signal that is output during the period is less than 0.2 s, the MPU 201 does not generate a "winning switch abnormal error" in the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b. Is set to “0”, which indicates (S530: No).

  On the other hand, if the ON signal from the start winning switch 208b is still output even after 0.2 s from the output start, the MPU 201 is performed every 2 ms for an excess period from 0.2 s after the output start. Every time the error determination process is performed, “1” is set to indicate that the “winning switch abnormal error” has occurred in the value of the second bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b (S530: Yes, S531).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, front frame opening determination processing is executed to determine whether a “front frame opening error” has occurred (S 503, see FIG. 25C).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the correspondence between the signal output from the front frame open switch 208e to the MPU 201 and the values of the third bit and the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 41A is a timing chart showing temporal changes in signal output from the front frame opening switch 208e to the MPU 201, and FIG. 41B is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. 41C is a timing chart showing temporal changes in the value of the third bit of the buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 41C is the fourth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, the front frame open switch 208e sends an OFF signal to the MPU 201 while the front frame 14 is closed. Output. When the off signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 closes the front frame 14 to the value of the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that there is a certain problem, that is, the "front frame opening detection error" has been eliminated. At this time, the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" indicating that the front frame is not in the open state (ie, in the closed state) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the MPU 201 sets “0” to the third bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b and “1” to the fourth bit every time the error determination processing is performed every 2 ms. Set

  On the other hand, while the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame open switch 208 e outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201. When this on signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 makes the front frame 14 open at the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that a certain thing, that is, "front frame opening detection error" has occurred. At this time, the fourth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at "0" indicating that the front frame is not closed (that is, it is open) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the front frame 14 is in the open state, the MPU 201 sets “1” to the third bit and “0” to the fourth bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b each time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the front frame opening prize determination process is executed to determine whether a "front frame opening prize error" has occurred (S504, see FIG. 26A).

  Here, referring to FIG. 42, the correspondence between the signal output from each of the front frame open switch 208 e and the start winning switch 208 b to the MPU 201 and the value of the third bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203 b explain.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a timing chart showing a temporal change of signal output from the front frame opening switch to the MPU, and FIG. 42 (b) is a temporal change of signal output from the start winning switch to the MPU FIG. 42C is a timing chart showing temporal change of the value of the first bit of the first error judgment buffer memory set in the MPU by the error judgment processing.

  As shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the front frame 14 is in the closed state, and the off signal from the front frame opening switch 208e is input to the MPU 201. In the case where the front frame 14 is open and there is no input signal from the start winning switch 208b even if the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208e is input, the MPU 201 performs a line every 2 ms. Every time the error determination process is performed, “0” is set in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b to indicate that “presence error at the time of opening the front frame” has not occurred (S550: No, 551 : No).

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is open, the ON signal from the front frame open switch 208 e is input, and the ON signal output while the ball is detected by the start winning switch 208 b is input to the MPU 201. During this period, the MPU 201 indicates that “the front frame opening winning error” has occurred in the first bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. “1” is set (S550: Yes, S551: Yes, S552).

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the inner frame open determination process is executed to determine whether an “inner frame open error” has occurred (S505, see FIG. 26 (b)).

  Now, with reference to FIG. 44, the correspondence between the signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208f to the MPU 201 and the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 208b will be described.

  FIG. 44 (a) is a timing chart showing temporal change in signal output from the inner frame opening switch 208f to the MPU 201, and FIG. 44 (a) is a first error determination set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. 44C is a timing chart showing temporal change of the value of the fifth bit of the buffer memory 203b, and FIG. 44C is the sixth bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b set in the MPU 201 by the error judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the time change of the value of.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as described above, while the inner frame 14 is in the closed state, the inner frame open switch 208f sends an OFF signal to the MPU 201. Output. When the off signal is input to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 closes the inner frame 12 to the value of the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. A "1" is shown to indicate that the "internal frame open detection error" has been eliminated. At this time, the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at “0”, which indicates that the inner frame is not in the open state (that is, in the closed state) (S540: No, S542). . Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the MPU 201 performs “0” in the fifth bit of the 1 error determination buffer memory 203 b and “1” in the sixth bit every time the error determination processing is performed every 2 ms. Set

  On the other hand, while the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the inner frame open switch 208 f outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201. When the on signal is input to the MPU 201, the inner frame 12 is opened to the value of the fifth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b every time the error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set "1" to indicate that there is a certain thing, that is, an "inner frame open detection error" has occurred. At this time, the sixth bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is maintained at “0”, which indicates that the inner frame is not in the closed state (that is, in the open state) (S540: No, S542) . Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the open state, the MPU 201 sets “1” to “5” and “0” to “6” of the error determination buffer memory 203 b each time an error determination process is performed every 2 ms. Set

  Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. Next, the processing of the illegal prize determination process is executed to determine whether or not the "incorrect prize opening error" has occurred (S506, see FIG. 27A).

  Here, referring to FIG. 45, the opening timing of the first large opening 65a (that is, the timing when the opening and closing plate of the first large opening 65a is driven by the first large opening solenoid) and the first large opening Correspondence between the signal output from the first specific winning switch 208c for detecting the ball passing through 65a to the MPU 201 and the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 based on the signal output Explain the relationship.

  FIG. 45 (a) is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the first large opening 65a and the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, and FIG. 45 (b) is a first specific winning switch 208c. 45C is a timing chart showing a temporal change in signal output from the MPU 201 to the MPU 201, and FIG. 45C shows the time of the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203c set in the MPU 201 by the error determination process. It is a timing chart which shows a typical change.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, after the occurrence of the big hit, the opening and closing operation of the first large opening 65a is performed for a predetermined period, and the effective passage period of the ball in the large opening 65a including the period is set. As described above, this period is a period in which sufficient time is taken for the first large opening 65a to completely close after the MPU 201 instructs the closing of the first opening 65a, and the first It is a period during which the ball that has passed through the opening 65a is handled as a ball that has passed by a normal game.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c), when the ON signal from the first specified winning switch 208c is input during a period other than the effective passage period of the ball at the first large opening 65a, the MPU 201 In the error judgment processing, the value of the seventh bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b is set to "1". When the first specific winning switch 208c detects passage of the ball in the first large opening 65a and outputs an ON signal to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 is used for the first error determination every time the error determination is performed every 2 ms. In the seventh bit of the buffer memory 203b, "1" is set to indicate that the "first incorrect prize error" has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the ball effective passage period in the first large opening 65a, the value of the seventh bit of the first error determination buffer memory 203b is "0" regardless of the state of the output signal from the first specific winning switch 208c. Is maintained.

  Also, since the 0th bit of the second specified winning opening 650a and the second error determination buffer memory 203c is also similar to the 7th bit of the first specified winning opening 65a and the first error determination buffer memory 203b, And I omit the explanation.

  Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. Next, the MPU 201 executes vibration detection processing (S507). The vibration detection process (S507) is the same process as that of the first embodiment described above. Next, it is determined whether or not other various errors have occurred (S508), and the process proceeds to S511.

  After shifting to the processing of S511, “DDh” is set as the value of the upper byte, and the value of the first error determination buffer memory 203b in which the value of each bit is set by each processing of S501 to S506 is set as the value of the lower byte. An error command is generated and set in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S511), and “DEh” is set as the value of the upper byte, and the value of each bit is set by each processing of S506 and S507. An error command having the value of the second error determination buffer memory 203c as the value of the lower byte is generated and set in the command transmission ring buffer (not shown) of the RAM 203 (S513). As a result, one error command in which information indicating the occurrence status of errors for a plurality of types is stored is put in a state where it can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S801) of the main process.

  Next, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c are cleared to 0 (initialized), and the error determination process (S102 and S711) is ended.

  As described above, in the error determination process (S102, S711), the occurrence of various errors is periodically determined based on the signals input from the various switches 208 to the MPU 201, and the errors are reflected in the determination results. A command was generated for each of the periodic determinations. Then, the generated command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer of the RAM 202 and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when an error command is transmitted in this manner, one error command is periodically set for each error determined for each type in the command transmission ring buffer of main controller 110. Because of this, an error command has squeezed the capacity of the ring buffer for command transmission.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since information indicating the occurrence of an error is set one by one in each bit of the lower byte of the error command composed of 2 bytes, the ring for command transmission It is possible to suppress the number of error commands set periodically for the buffer. Therefore, even in the case of a model that periodically generates an error command, it is possible to preferably transmit the command.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, while an error is occurring, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits an error command indicating that the error is occurring to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to surely know the occurrence of the error by notification.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 46 and 47, when the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment receives an error command transmitted from the main control device 110, one of the command determination processing S1014 An error operation execution process (S1109) to be executed as the process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this error operation execution process (S1109). The error operation execution process (S1109) is a process corresponding to the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, as described above in the first embodiment.

  First, the difference between the error operation execution process (S1109) of the second embodiment and the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the error-time operation execution process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment, the specific two of the low-order bytes of the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured by the processes of S1126 to S1129. Each process determines whether or not the combination of bits is an incorrect combination that can not be a normal command generated by the master controller 110, and a combination of two specific bits in any process is incorrect. When it is determined that the error command is an incorrect error command, notification is not performed based on the information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the error command.

  Further, when an error command in which a specific 2-bit value is abnormal is continuously received a predetermined number of times, the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 is notified.

  Also in the error operation execution process (S1109) of the second embodiment, processing for determining the occurrence of wiring abnormality is performed as in the error operation execution process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment. It differs in the point. That is, in the error determination process (FIG. 46) of the second embodiment, when a specific combination of 2-bit values receives an incorrect error command, the error is not detected regardless of the abnormal 2-bit type. If the number of times an error command containing 2 bits is received is counted using wiring abnormality determination counter 223b, and the count value becomes a fixed value (determination threshold) within a predetermined time (monitoring time), The cause of the normal error command is that there is a high possibility of the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113 Do.

  In the following, such differences are mainly described. The same step numbers as those in the first embodiment are the same as the error operation execution process (S1109) in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the error operation execution process (S1109), first, it is determined whether the value of the upper byte of the received error command is "DDh", "DEh", or any other value ( S1121).

  If it is determined that the upper byte of the received error command is "DDh" (S1121: "DDh"), the process proceeds to S2001, and the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the lower byte It is determined whether the value of the fourth bit of is an incorrect combination (S2001).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the third bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is the value of the third bit and the fourth bit. . Both are a combination of “1” s, or both are a combination of “0” s. The failure of these combinations means that one of the bits indicates that the front frame 14 is open (not closed), and the other bit indicates that the front frame 14 is closed (not open). This is because it is a contradiction that indicates that the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination processes S102 and S711 executed by the main control unit 110. If it is determined in the process of S2001 that the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are any of the incorrect combinations (S2001: Yes), wiring The process proceeds to abnormality determination processing (S2008).

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, in the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008), to the wiring 302 connecting the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113. It is determined whether or not a disconnection or short has occurred, and processing according to the determination result is executed. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 18).

  If the value of the third bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte of the error command are determined to be correct combinations by the process of S2001 (S2001: No), then the error command It is determined whether or not the value of the first bit of the lower byte and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2002).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the values of the first bit and the third bit of the lower byte is “1”, the third bit is the third bit. The bit is a combination of "0". This combination is not normal because the value of the first bit is "1", and the "front frame opening winning error" that occurs when the front frame 14 is open has occurred. It is contradictory that indicates that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (is in the closed state) despite being shown, and is generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. This is because it is an impossible combination of normal commands. If it is determined by the process of S1127 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2002: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S2002 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2002: No), an error is generated next. It is determined whether the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2003).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the error command of the upper byte “DDh”, the incorrect combination of the first bit and the fourth bit of the lower byte is the value of the first bit and the fourth bit. Both are combinations of "1". This combination is not normal because the value of the first bit is "1", and the "front frame opening winning error" that occurs when the front frame 14 is open has occurred. It is contradictory that indicates that the front frame 14 is not in the open state (is in the closed state) despite being shown, and is generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. This is because it is an impossible combination of normal commands. If it is determined by the process of S2003 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the third bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2003: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2003 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the fourth bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2003: No), then S2004 Then, it is determined whether the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are an improper combination (S2004).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the incorrect combination of the values of the fifth bit and the sixth bit of the lower byte in the error command of the upper byte “DDh” is the value of the fifth bit and the sixth bit. . Both are a combination of “1” s, or both are a combination of “0” s. The failure of these combinations means that one bit indicates that the inner frame 12 is open (not closed), and the other bit indicates that the inner frame 12 is closed (not open). This is because it is a contradiction which indicates that the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by the main control unit 110. If it is determined in the process of S1129 that the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are any of the incorrect combinations (S2004: Yes), wiring The process proceeds to abnormality determination processing (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the fifth bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the sixth bit of the lower byte are a normal combination by the process of S2004 (S2005: No), the upper byte Processing is performed according to the status of occurrence of various errors specified by “DDh” and the value of each bit of the lower byte (S2005). That is, lighting of each lamp, display by the 7-segment display 37b, or voice output from the speaker is performed in a mode corresponding to the value of each bit constituting the lower byte, and the generated error is notified. Thereafter, the process returns to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  It returns to the process of S1121 and continues description. If it is determined by the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is "DEh" (S1121: "DEh"), the process proceeds to the process of S2006 and the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command It is determined whether or not the value of the second bit of the lower byte is an incorrect combination (S2006). As described above, in the error command of the upper byte "DEh", the incorrect combination of the values of the first bit and the second bit of the lower byte is that both the values of the first bit and the second bit are "1". A combination of This combination is not normal if the first bit of the lower byte indicates that the vibration of the set value level is detected by the vibration sensor 208g, and the second bit of the lower byte is detected by the vibration sensor 208g It is contradictory that the vibration level is less than the set value level, and the combination can not be a normal command generated by the error determination process (S102, S711) executed by main controller 110. is there. If it is determined in the process of S113 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the second bit of the lower byte are an incorrect combination (S2006: Yes), wiring abnormality determination processing Shift to (S2008).

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S2006 that the value of the first bit of the lower byte of the error command and the value of the second bit of the lower byte are a normal combination (S2006: No), the upper byte “ Processing corresponding to the occurrence status of various errors specified by the value of each bit of “DEh” and the lower byte is performed (S2005), and the process returns to the command determination processing (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Returning to the process of S1121 again, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1121 that the value of the upper byte of the error command is neither "DDh" nor "DEh" (S1121: Other), the process according to the type of the received error command is executed (S1131) , And then return to the command determination process (S1014, see FIG. 30).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008). The wiring abnormality determination process (S2008) is performed in the error operation execution process (S1109, see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the error operation execution process When it is determined that the error command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an abnormal command by any of the processes of S2001 to S2004 and the process of S2006 of (S1109) (S2001 to S2004 And when the process proceeds to “Yes” in any of the processes in S2006), the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control unit 113 are connected. It is determined whether or not a wiring abnormality has occurred, and processing according to the determination result is executed.

  In the wiring abnormality determination processing (2008), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is "0", that is, whether or not it is initialized (S2101), and is initialized (S2101: Yes) The timing by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) is started (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103.

  If it is determined by the process of S2101 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is not "0", the process of S2102 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2103. In this case, in the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b, the number of times of reception of an abnormal error command from the start of time counting is reflected in the wiring abnormality determination processing (S1129) so far.

  In the process of S2103, the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is incremented by 1 to update the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 has received an abnormal error command (S2103).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a value larger than the determination threshold set in advance (S2104). If the voice lamp control device 113 receives an abnormal error command the number of times greater than this value within the monitoring period to be described later, each abnormal error command is a single-shot such as noise. This value is large enough to recognize that it is not due to a specific cause but due to a continuous cause such as wiring abnormality. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, "10" is set as the determination threshold value.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S2104 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is larger than the determination threshold (S2104: No), it is determined that the wiring abnormality has occurred. Informing of occurrence of wiring abnormality by lighting of each lamp, display by 7-segment display device 37b or sound output from a speaker performed in a mode according to wiring abnormality (S2105), error Return to the time operation execution process.

  When it is determined by the process of S2104 that the value of the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b is a value equal to or less than the determination threshold (S2104: No), the time period measured by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) is the wiring It is determined whether or not a monitoring period set in advance as a period for determining an abnormality has been exceeded (S2106). The monitoring period in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set to 50 ms from the start of clocking.

  If it is determined by the process of S2104 that the clocking period by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) does not exceed the monitoring period (S2104: No), this process is ended and an error operation execution process is performed. Return.

  On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S2106 that the clocking period by the wiring abnormality monitoring timer (not shown) exceeds the monitoring period (S2104: Yes), the clocking is ended and the wiring abnormality determination counter The value of 323b is cleared to 0, this processing is ended, and the process returns to the operation execution processing at error (S2107, S2108).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment of the present invention, the upper byte "DDh" and the upper byte "DEh" generated by the main control device 110 executing the error determination process (S102) The low-order byte contains information indicating the occurrence of multiple errors of different types in the low-order byte, so sending the one error command only causes the voice lamp control device 113 to indicate the occurrence of multiple errors. It can be notified. Therefore, the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced as compared with the case where the occurrence status of each type of error is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by separate commands. Therefore, in the external output process (S801) of the main process (see FIG. 23), it is possible to reduce the processing load imposed on the main control device 110 for transmitting an error command. In addition, a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 for storing a command before transmission can compress the capacity occupied by an error command, and the capacity of the command transmission ring buffer can be made efficient. It can be used. Therefore, command transmission from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be suitably performed.

  In addition, various errors whose judgment results are stored in each bit of the first error judgment buffer memory 203b by the error judgment processing (S102) are also adopted in a pachinko machine having a different model from that of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In an error related to the highly probable configuration (that is, the radio wave detection device 208a, the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the first ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the first large opening (first specified winning opening) 65a) It is a highly probable error that notification is required also for pachinko machines of different types. Therefore, even with different types of pachinko machines, it is possible to create a program etc. by using the code etc. of the error command of the upper byte "DDh", and thus notification of the occurrence of multiple types of errors with one error command. Making it easy to create a pachinko machine.

  Main controller 110 determines the value (state) of at least two specific bits constituting the lower byte of the error command of upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" by the error determination process (S102, S711). An error command is generated so as not to be an incorrect combination of the above and is sequentially transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the main processing. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the value of a specific bit constituting the lower byte of the error command is not generated by the main control device 110 by the operation upon execution of an error (S1109). It is determined whether or not the combination is incorrect (in the processes of S2001 to S2004 or S2006), and in the case of the incorrect combination (in any of the processes of S2001 to S2004 and S2006), the process proceeds to No branch. (In the case of (1)), the notification based on the information of the lower byte of the error command is not executed. As a result, it can be suppressed that the occurrence of an error is erroneously notified, and the reliability of the error notification can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of receptions of the error command determined that the lower byte 2 bits are in an improper combination by the wiring abnormality determination counter 323b for a predetermined period (monitoring period), and Based on the count value, it is determined whether or not the error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh” of the combination in which the lower byte 2 bit is improper is continuously received by the voice lamp control unit 113. When it is determined that each command is continuously received, it is highly probable that the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality such as a disconnection or a short circuit, the lighting of the lamp, and the 7-segment display 37b. And a voice output from a speaker to notify that effect. As a result, when a wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the clerk of the game arcade can promptly replace the wiring 302 and the like, and the wiring abnormality can be resolved.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the error command of the upper byte “DDh” or “DEh” transmitted from the main control device 110 has changed the occurrence status of any error corresponding to the error command. First, it is transmitted only at the timing (the timing at which it occurred or resolved), and even if the wiring 302 has a wiring abnormality, if the occurrence status of the error does not change at least twice or more (first In the embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 can not determine whether the abnormal lamp command is caused by noise which is a single phenomenon or due to a wiring abnormality which is a continuous phenomenon. Can not execute notification for

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" is sequentially sent from the main control unit 110 regardless of the occurrence status of the error. In the case where a problem occurs, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the wiring abnormality based on those commands, and can promptly notify the wiring abnormality. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 occurs, the notification to that effect can be performed more preferably.

  In the above embodiment, various commands are 8-bit parallel data, and 8-bit (8-bit) connected between the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 215 of the audio lamp control unit 113. The main controller 110 transmits a command to the audio lamp control device 113 through the parallel wiring 302) in one direction from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the command is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 performs external output processing (S801) to transmit from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, various commands are transmitted as serial data via one serial wire connected between the input / output port 205 of the main control unit 110 and the input / output port 215 of the audio lamp control unit 113. It is also good. In this case, as the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, one provided with the following data transmission / reception circuit can be adopted. That is, it has a predetermined buffer, and has a data transmission / reception circuit that transmits a command set in the buffer by the MPU 201 to the reception command buffer of the audio lamp control device 113 independently of the processing of the MPU 201. can do.

  When the MPU 201 is provided with such a data transmission / reception circuit to transmit an error command to the audio lamp control device 113, the main control unit 110 of the MPU 201 does not need to transmit a command by external output processing (S801). In each of the processes of S509 and S510, an error command can be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 only by setting an error command in the buffer of the data transmission / reception circuit instead of storing in the ring buffer for command transmission. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be further reduced.

  At this time, it is necessary to always set the seventh bit to a fixed value of "0" or "1" to indicate the delimitation of one command, in the lower byte of each command. Therefore, in the case where the MPU 201 is provided with the above-described data transmission / reception circuit, the first and second error determination buffer memories 203b and 203c need not to store error occurrence information in their seventh bits. is there.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes an error determination process (S102) each time the timer interrupt process is executed in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 ms, and various errors Although the case of performing the determination of has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the error determination process may be performed in the main process. Also, when the error determination process is performed as one process of the timer interrupt process or the main process, it is not performed every time the timer interrupt process or the main process is executed, but each time the process is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) Processing may be performed once.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the error operation execution process (1109) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, an error in which one type of information indicating the occurrence status of each type error is set in each bit of the lower byte Although it has been described that the determination as to whether or not the command is an incorrect command is made on the basis of whether or not the value of the incorrect combination is set in the specific 2 bits of the lower byte, It is not limited to this. For example, whether or not an error command is abnormal may be determined by a combination of values of 3 bits or more.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the error operation execution process (1109) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined whether the error command of the upper byte "DEh" is an abnormal command or not. Although the case where the determination is made based on the values of the first bit and the second bit in the lower byte of the command has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and based on the values of the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte. It may be determined whether or not the command is abnormal. In the above respective embodiments, the error command of the upper byte “DEh” is a command of the fixed value of “0” in all of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte. If the MPU 221 determines that "1" is stored in any of these bits, it means that the command including the bit is affected by noise or wiring abnormality. Therefore, in the first embodiment, whether “1” is stored in any of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte in the second error operation execution process (see FIG. 33), It is configured to make a determination together with the determination processing of S1155, and when any one of those bits is “1”, the error notification based on the error command including the bit is not executed. Furthermore, each time an error command of the upper byte "DEh" in which "1" is stored in the same bit among the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte is counted, the count value becomes a predetermined value ( For example, in the case of 3), it is determined that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred, and that effect is notified. According to this, since it is possible to determine whether or not the error command is an abnormal one based on the value of one bit, it is possible to more effectively suppress an erroneous error notification. In the second embodiment, whether or not “1” is stored in any of the third to seventh bits of the lower byte in the error operation execution process (see FIG. 46), as in S2006. If any one of those bits is “1”, the process proceeds to the wiring abnormality determination process (S2008), and the error notification based on the error command including the bit is not made. Make it run. Furthermore, the error command of the upper byte “DEh” in which “1” is stored in the same bit among the third bit to the seventh bit of the lower byte is counted using the wiring abnormality determination counter 323 b like other commands. If the count value reaches a determination threshold value (for example, 10) within a predetermined time, it is determined that the wiring abnormality of the wiring 302 has occurred, and notification of that is performed. Also in this case, the same effects as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In each of the above embodiments, the upper byte of the error command including information indicating the occurrence status of a plurality of types of errors has been described using two types of “DDh” and “DEh”. If it is a value that is not limited and can identify an error command and the type of information indicating the occurrence of an error included in the error command, the value does not overlap with the upper byte of another command. Values other than DDh "and" DEh "can be used.

  The error command of the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "command" described in the claims, and the upper byte "DDh" or "DEh" described in the above embodiment. The value of each bit included in the low-order byte in corresponds to “determination result information” described in the claims, and the ring buffer for command transmission of the RAM 203 described in the above embodiment is described in the claims. Corresponds to the "command storage means" of

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

  Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for controlling the game based on commands transmitted from the main control means via the signal line, and notification based on instructions from the slave control means A gaming machine comprising notification means for performing, the detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means; Command generation means for generating a command; command storage means capable of storing a plurality of the commands; command storage and execution means for storing the command in the command storage means when the command is generated by the command generation means; Transmission means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means; and plural types of malfunctions in the gaming machine And a determination unit that determines whether any one of the states is determined based on the detection result of the detection unit, and the command generation unit determines the determination result of the determination unit. It is result information, and generates a command including a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine in one command, When the slave control means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the game machine is in one of the abnormal states based on the determination result information included in the command. A slave-side determining unit that determines whether or not the game machine is unauthorized based on the determination result information included in the command received by the slave control unit. If it is determined by said detail side determination unit has a state, the gaming machine A1, characterized in that is an indication of the notification in accordance with the state to the informing means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the detecting means detects the state of the gaming machine, the command generating means of the main control means generates a command based on the detected state of the gaming machine, and the command storage executing means , The command is stored in a plurality of storable command storage units. Here, the main control means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has become based on the detection result of the detection means. The command generation means is the judgment result information indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and the plural judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among plural kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine is Generate a command to be included in the command. Therefore, when an unsent command stored in the command storage unit is transmitted to the slave control unit, the slave control unit having received the command is based on the determination result information included in the command. The slave-side determining means determines that the gaming machine is in any abnormal state. If it is determined by the subordinate determination means that the gaming machine is in any of the abnormal states, the notification means is instructed to notify in accordance with the state. Therefore, the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including, in one command, a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine. By transmitting to the control means, notification can be executed according to a plurality of determination result information included in the command, so that a command including one determination result information is generated for each type of unauthorized state of the gaming machine. The number of commands generated by the main control means can be reduced compared to the case of generation. As a result, the capacity of the command storage unit can be efficiently used, so that there is an effect that transmission of a command from the main control unit to the sub control unit can be suitably performed.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the command generation unit generates a command including first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine, the command generation means is not compatible with the first state in the command. The command is generated without including the second determination result information corresponding to the two states, and the slave determination unit receives the command transmitted by the transmission unit when the slave control unit receives the command. A second slave-side determining unit that determines whether the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included in the received command, and the second slave-side determining unit When it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included, the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed. Gaming machine A2 wherein there.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including the first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine in one command, the command is incompatible with the first state. The second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine is not included. In spite of that, it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the command received by the secondary control means by the second secondary side determination means of the secondary control means. In this case, the command received by the slave control unit is affected by noise mixing in the wiring interposed between the master control unit and the slave control unit or a break or short circuit in the wiring. May be In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A2, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, A game machine A3 that instructs the notification means to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined by the subordinate side determination means that the game machine is in an abnormal state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a command including the first determination result information and the second determination result information is continuously received by the secondary control means, each command is not due to a single noise effect, and the main control There is a high possibility that the phenomenon may be due to a continuous phenomenon such as a short circuit or an open circuit of a wire which intervenes the means and the secondary control means. On the other hand, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, the slave side determination means The notification means is instructed to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. By this notification, it is possible to notify the attendants of the game arcade that there may have been a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring, so the game is played by the gaming machine in a state in which the short circuit or disconnection of the wiring has occurred. Has the effect of being able to prevent

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the command generation means generates a command including, in one command, fixed value information unrelated to the state of the game machine together with the plurality of determination result information. When the slave side determination means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the slave side determination means determines whether or not the fixed value information is included in the received command. A third slave determination means is provided, and when the third slave determination means determines that the fixed value information is included in the received command, notification based on the determination result information included in the received command A game machine A4 characterized by non-executing an instruction of

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the command generation means of the main control means generates a command including one set of fixed value information unrelated to the state of the gaming machine together with a plurality of determination result information. If it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included in the command received by the secondary control means by the third secondary-side determination means of the secondary control means, the secondary control The command received by the means may be influenced by noise mixed in a signal line interposed between the main control means and the secondary control means. In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A3, the determination means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is in a predetermined time interval. The command generation unit is the determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination unit each time the determination unit performs the determination for each predetermined time, and the plurality of types of defects in the gaming machine are determined. A game machine B1 that generates a command including a plurality of pieces of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the normal states in one command.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination means of the main control means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is set, at predetermined time intervals. The command is a command that includes a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine each time by the command generation unit. Generate Therefore, the slave control means can perform the determination by the second slave side determination means one by one by transmitting such a command by the transmission means, so that an abnormal state such as a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring can be found promptly. To that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably prevent the game from being performed by the gaming machine in a state in which a short circuit or a disconnection or the like of the wiring occurs.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the main control means is a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine, and one command including a plurality of the determination result information generated by the command generating means. If it is determined by the determination means that the corresponding abnormal state is not in any state, the command storage non-storage of the one command generated by the command generation means is not performed in the command storage means. A game machine C1 characterized by comprising execution means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the play machine A1 to A4, the following effect is exerted. That is, it is determined that one command including a plurality of the determination result information generated by the command generation unit is not in any of the abnormal states of the gaming machine corresponding to the one command. When it is determined by the command storage non-execution means, the first command is not stored in the command storage means, so that the free space of the command storage means can be increased. As a result, since the command storage means can be used more efficiently, there is an effect that the transmission of the command from the main control means to the sub control means can be performed more preferably.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 and C1, the command generation means includes only the determination result information corresponding to an abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model. A game machine D1 characterized by generating a first command including the plurality of determination result information.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by A1 to A4, B1 and C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the command generation means generates the first command including the plurality of pieces of determination result information consisting only of the determination result information corresponding to the abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game nature for each model. The code of the first command can be used repeatedly between different models to create command generation means for different models. For this reason, it is possible to facilitate creation of a notifying gaming machine having a command generation unit that generates a command including a plurality of determination result information.

  In the gaming machine D1, when the command generation unit generates a command including the plurality of determination result information in addition to the first command, the command may not be generated depending on the game content or the game characteristics of the gaming machine. A game machine D2 characterized by including only the determination result information corresponding to a normal state.

  That is, the command generation means generates the judgment result information corresponding to the abnormal state that may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model, and the abnormal state generated according to the game content or the game property of the gaming machine. Since a command mixed with determination result information corresponding to a state is not generated, a command including determination result information corresponding to an abnormal state which may occur regardless of the game content or the game property for each model Can be used among different models to more easily create command generation means for different models.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1 and D2, whether or not the judging means is in any of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine when the power is turned on Is determined based on various states of the gaming machine detected by the detection means, and the command generation means is determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination means, Generating a third command including, in one command, a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the type of abnormal states and fixed value information unrelated to the determination result information And the slave-side determining unit includes the fixed value information in the third command when the third command transmitted by the transmitting unit is received when the power is turned on. The second slave determination means for determining whether the third command is included or not, and the second slave determination means determines that the third command does not include the fixed value information. A game machine E1 for instructing the notification means to notify.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the play gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1 and D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the main control means is the determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination means by the command generation means, and a plurality of determination result information corresponding to two or more of the plural types of abnormal states in the gaming machine And a fixed value information unrelated to the determination result information in one command, and a third command is generated and generated, and this is transmitted to the slave control means by the transmission means. When the slave control means receives this third command, it is judged by the fourth slave side judgment means of the slave side judgment means whether fixed value information is included in the third command or not. Then, when it is determined by the fourth slave-side determining unit that the fixed-value information is not included in the determination result information included in the command, the notifying unit instructs the notifying unit to notify. Here, if there is no abnormality in the wiring corresponding to the fixed value information, while the secondary control means can determine that the fixed value information is included by the fourth slave side determining means, the fixed value information is included. If not, it means that an abnormality such as disconnection or short circuit has occurred in the wiring corresponding to the fixed value information. Therefore, before the game is started, it is possible to detect that an abnormality has occurred in the wiring or the detection means, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being started in the state in which the abnormality has occurred in the wiring. It has the effect of

  A gaming machine E1 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2, E1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine E2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2, and E1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (large opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1, C1, D1, D2 and E1, a gaming machine E3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
A gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine mainly comprises detecting means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, main control means for controlling the game, and various commands transmitted from the main control means And a variety of devices such as a display device, a lamp, and an audio output device connected to the slave control means. When the main control means determines that the state of the gaming machine is in the predetermined state based on the detection of the state of the gaming machine by the detection means, the main control means notifies the slave control means in order to notify that the state is reached. Send a command The slave control means makes a notification using various devices according to the command (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-155158).
Here, in order to notify that the state of the gaming machine has reached a predetermined state, the main control means sends command to the slave control means in the command storage means provided in the main control means. You need to store the command.
The main control means is not only a command for informing that the state of the gaming machine has reached a predetermined state, but in order to cause the slave control means to perform various controls, various other commands are sequentially stored in the command storage means Remember to
At this time, if a command is stored in the command storage means in the full storage capacity of the command storage means, there is a possibility that the instruction given by the main control means to the slave control means may be inaccurate. there were.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is preferable to transmit a command from the main control means to the sub control means by efficiently using the capacity of the command storage means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be performed.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 controls the game based on the main control means for performing main control of the game and the command transmitted from the main control means via the signal line. A control means and a notification means for giving a notification based on an instruction from the secondary control means, and a detection means for detecting various states of the gaming machine, the main control means comprising the detection means When a command is generated by a command generation unit for generating a command, a command storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the commands, and a command generation unit based on the detected status of the gaming machine, the command is Command storage / executing means to be stored in the command storage means; transmitting means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means; And determining means for determining whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is based on the detection result of the detection means, the command generation means comprising It is the judgment result information which shows the judgment result of the above-mentioned judgment means, and contains a plurality of the judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among a plurality of kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine in one command. When the command is generated, and the slave control means receives a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means, the gaming machine is based on the determination result information included in the command. A slave-side determining means for determining whether or not one of the above-mentioned abnormal states is established, and based on the determination result information contained in the command received by the Te, when the gaming machine is determined by said detail side determination means has a non-normal state of any is to instruct the notification in accordance with the state to the notifying means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the command generation unit generates a command including first determination result information corresponding to a first state of the gaming machine. The command is generated without including second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine incompatible with the first state in the command, and the slave side determination means transmits by the transmission means. When the slave control unit receives the command, the second control unit determines whether the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included in the received command. A determination result included in the command, provided with a subordinate determination means, when it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included by the second subordinate determination means. Love Instructions to based notification is to the non-executable.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the slave control means includes the first determination result information and the second determination result information by the second slave side determining means. When the determined command is continuously received, the notification means is instructed to notify the notification means in a mode different from the case where it is determined by the subordinate side determination means that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. It is
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the determination unit is configured to, during a predetermined time, any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine. It is determined whether or not it is in the above state based on the detection result of the detection means, and the command generation means determines the determination means every time the determination means performs the determination for each predetermined time. A determination result information indicating a determination result of a plurality of pieces of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the It is
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the state of the gaming machine is detected by the detecting means, the command generating means of the main control means generates a command based on the detected state of the gaming machine, The command storage execution means stores the command in a plurality of storable command storages. Here, the main control means is provided with a determination means for determining whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has become based on the detection result of the detection means. The command generation means is the judgment result information indicating the judgment result of the judgment means, and the plural judgment result information corresponding to predetermined two or more among plural kinds of abnormal states in the gaming machine is Generate a command to be included in the command. Therefore, when an unsent command stored in the command storage unit is transmitted to the slave control unit, the slave control unit having received the command is based on the determination result information included in the command. The slave-side determining means determines that the gaming machine is in any abnormal state. If it is determined by the subordinate determination means that the gaming machine is in any of the abnormal states, the notification means is instructed to notify in accordance with the state. Therefore, the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including, in one command, a plurality of pieces of determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine. By transmitting to the control means, notification can be executed according to a plurality of determination result information included in the command, so that a command including one determination result information is generated for each type of unauthorized state of the gaming machine. The number of commands generated by the main control means can be reduced compared to the case of generation. As a result, the capacity of the command storage unit can be efficiently used, so that there is an effect that transmission of a command from the main control unit to the sub control unit can be suitably performed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, when the command generation unit of the main control unit generates a command including the first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine in one command, the command is incompatible with the first state. The second determination result information corresponding to the second state of the gaming machine is not included. In spite of that, it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the command received by the secondary control means by the second secondary side determination means of the secondary control means. In this case, the command received by the slave control unit is affected by noise mixing in the wiring interposed between the master control unit and the slave control unit or a break or short circuit in the wiring. May be In such a case, all the determination result information included in the command received by the secondary control means may not be correct determination result information based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means. In such a case, since the notification instruction based on the determination result information included in the command is not executed, there is an effect that the reliability of the notification can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, when a command including the first determination result information and the second determination result information is continuously received by the secondary control means, each command is not due to a single noise effect, and the main control There is a high possibility that the phenomenon may be due to a continuous phenomenon such as a short circuit or an open circuit of a wire which intervenes the means and the secondary control means. On the other hand, when the slave control means continuously receives the command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, the slave side determination means The notification means is instructed to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. By this notification, it is possible to notify the attendants of the game arcade that there may have been a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring, so the game is played by the gaming machine in a state in which the short circuit or disconnection of the wiring has occurred. Has the effect of being able to prevent
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the determination means of the main control means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is set, at predetermined time intervals. The command is a command that includes a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to two or more of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine each time by the command generation unit. Generate Therefore, the slave control means can perform the determination by the second slave side determination means one by one by transmitting such a command by the transmission means, so that an abnormal state such as a short circuit or disconnection of the wiring can be found promptly. To that effect. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably prevent the game from being performed by the gaming machine in a state in which a short circuit or a disconnection or the like of the wiring occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
29 to 33 Electric decoration 37b 7-segment display (part of notification means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 main controller 110 (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device 113 (follow control means)
208 Various switches (part of detection means)
226 Voice output device (part of notification means)
S102, S711 Command determination processing S501 to S508 Determination unit, command generation unit S511, S513 Command storage execution unit S510, S512 Command storage non-execution unit S801 External output processing (transmission unit)
S1109 Error operation execution processing ( first slave side judgment means)
S1131, S1136, S1139, S1155 Second slave side determination means S2001 to S2004, S2006 second slave side determination means

Claims (4)

Main control means for performing main control of the game, slave control means for controlling the game based on commands transmitted from the main control means via the signal line, and notification based on instructions from the slave control means In the gaming machine provided with notification means for performing
A detection unit for detecting various states of the gaming machine;
The main control means
Command generation means for generating a command based on the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means;
Command storage means capable of storing a plurality of the commands;
Command storage and execution means for storing the command in the command storage means when the command is generated by the command generation means;
Transmission means for sequentially transmitting unsent commands stored in the command storage means to the slave control means;
And determining means for determining, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not any one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine has been established.
The command generation means is determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination means, and a plurality of pieces of the determination result information corresponding to predetermined two or more of the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine are To generate the commands included in
The slave control means
When a command including the determination result information transmitted by the transmission means is received, whether or not the gaming machine is in one of the abnormal states based on the determination result information included in the command A second-side determining means for determining
If it is determined by the subordinate-side determining means that the gaming machine is in any abnormal state based on the determination result information contained in the command received by the secondary control means A game machine characterized by instructing a notification according to a state to the notification means. When the command generation unit generates a command including first determination result information corresponding to the first state of the gaming machine, the command corresponds to the second state of the gaming machine incompatible with the first state. Generating the command without including the second determination result information;
The slave side determination means
Whether the first determination result information and the second determination result information are included in the received command when the slave control unit receives the command transmitted by the transmission unit A second slave side determination means for determining
When it is determined that the first determination result information and the second determination result information are both included by the second slave side determination means, an instruction for notification based on the determination result information included in the command is The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is not to be executed.   When the slave control means continuously receives a command determined by the second slave side determination means to include the first determination result information and the second determination result information, the slave side determination means 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the notification means is instructed to notify in a mode different from the case where it is determined that the gaming machine is in an abnormal state. The determination means determines, based on the detection result of the detection means, whether or not one of a plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine is set, at predetermined time intervals. ,
The command generation unit is determination result information indicating the determination result of the determination unit each time the determination unit performs the determination for each predetermined time, and the predetermined among the plurality of types of abnormal states in the gaming machine The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a command including a plurality of the determination result information corresponding to two or more of them in one command is generated.

Images